Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Students can Download Chapter 7 Web Hosting Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Plus Two Computer Science Web Hosting One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The companies that provide web hosting services are called ______.
Answer:
Web Hosts

Question 2.
The service of providing storage space in a web server to make a website available on Internet is called
Answer:
web hosting

Question 3.
Which of the following is true in the case of dedicated hosting?
(a) It shares server with other websites.
(b) It is usually inexpensive.
(c) It does not guarantee performance.
(d) It offers freedom for the clients to choose the hardware and the software.
Answer:
(d) only

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 4.
Choose the odd one out, and justify your answer.
(a) Shared hosting
(b) Dedicated hosting
(c) DNS
(d) Virtual Private Server
Answer:
(c) DNS others are types of web hosting.

Question 5.
______ is the service of providing storage space in a Webserver.

OR

Storing the web pages of a website in a server is popularly known as _____.
Answer:
Web hosting

Question 6.
The companies that provide web hosting services are called _______.
Answer:
Web hosts

Question 7.
Odd one out.
(a) Shared
(b) Dedicated
(c) VPS
(d) DNS
Answer:
(d) DNS means Domain Name System. The others are types of web hosting

Question 8.
VPS stands for _____ .
Answer:
Virtual Private Server.

Question 9.
From the following select the most commonly used web hosting.
(a) Shared
(b) Dedicated
(c) VPS
(d) DNS
Answer:
(a) Shared hosting

Question 10.
DNS stands for ____.
Answer:
Domain Name System

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 11.
‘A record’ means ______ .
Answer:
Address record

Question 12.
FTP stands for _____ .
Answer:
File Transfer Protocol.

Question 13.
Odd one out.
(a) Mozilla Firefox
(b) FileZilla
(c) CuteFTP
(d) SmartFTP
Answer:
(a) Mozilla Firefox, it is a web browser, the others are popular FTP client software

Question 14.
______ hosting provides web hosting services free of charge.
Answer:
Free hosting

Question 15.
Give an example for Free web hosting services with sub-domain website address.
Answer:
www.bvmhsskalparamba.facebook.com

Question 16.
Give an example for Free web hosting services with directory service website address.
Answer:
www.facebook.com/bvmhsSkalparamba

Question 17.
CMS stands for ____.
Answer:
Content Management System

Question 18.
The term ‘responsive web designing’ was introduced by _____.
Answer:
Ethan Marcotte

Question 19.
The method of Flexible designing of web pages to suit the various types of screens is called _____.
Answer:
Responsive web design method

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 20.
In dedicated hosting, if the client is allowed to place his own purchased web server in the service provider’s facility, then it is called _______.
Answer:
Co-location

Question 21.
What are the information contained in a ICANN database?
Answer:
Registered domain names/name, address, telephone number and e-mail address of the registrants.

Question 22.
What is‘A record’?
Answer:
‘A record’ is used to store the IP address and the corresponding domain name

Question 23.
Joomla is an example for ______ .
(a) CMS
(b) ISP
(c) DNS
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) CMS

Question 24.
The responsive web design feature that converts horizontal menu to a drop-down menu in mobile phones is called ______.
Answer:
Media queries

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 25.
The organization that maintains the WHOIS database of domain names is ______.
Answer:
ICANN

Plus Two Computer Science Web Hosting Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Consider that your school is planning to host a website. What are the factors that you will consider while choosing the type of web hosting?
Answer:
Following factors to be considered

  1. Buying sufficient amount of memory space for storing our website files
  2. If the web pages contain programming contents supporting technology must be considered
  3. Based upon the programs select Windows hosting or Linux hosting

Question 2.
Emmanuel wishes to buy a suitable domain for his company. Unfortunately, the domain name he chose is already registered by someone else. Name the feature that will help him to find the current owner. List the details will he get.
Answer:
WHOIS
Name, address, telephone number and e-mail address of the registrant

Question 3.
What is the use of FTP client software? Give an example.
Answer:
FTP (File Transfer Protocol) client software:
When a client requests a website by entering website address. Then FTP client software helps to establish a connection between client computer and remote server computer. Unauthorised access is denied by using user name and password hence secure our website files for that SSH(Secure Shell) FTP simply SFTP is used.

Instead of http://, it uses ftp://. By using FTP client s/w we can transfer(upload) the files from our computer to the web server by using the ‘drag and drop’ method. The popular FTP client software are FileZilla, CuteFTP, SmartFTP, etc.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 4.
Haseena has decided to host her new website using free hosting facility; her friend Rinisha is against this move. Can you guess her argument against the utilization of free hosting facility?
Answer:
In free web hosting service, the expense is meet by the advertisements. Some service providers allow limited facilities such as limited storage space, do not allow multimedia (audio and video) files.

Plus Two Computer Science Web Hosting Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Priya has developed a website for her shop. She has purchased a domain name and hosting space.

  1. Name the software that will help her to transfer her files from her computer to the webserver.
  2. List the requirements in that software that are necessary to connect to the webserver.

Answer:

  1. FTP software such as FileZilla, Cute FTP, Smart FTP
  2. Following are the requirements to connect to the Webserver
    • Domain name /IP address
    • User name.
    • Password

Question 2.
Explain the advantages of using SFTP protocol in FTP client software.
Answer:
Unauthorized access is denied by using username and password hence secure our website files, for this SSH (Secure Shell) FTP simply SFTP is used. It encrypts and sends usernames, passwords, and data to the webserver.

Question 3.
Merin plans to create a website for their family without spending money.

  1. List some of the limitations that Merin will face regarding the hosting space for website.
  2. How will she provide a domain name for the website?

Answer:
1. In free web hosting service, the expense is meet by the advertisements. Some service providers allow limited facilities such as limited storage space, do not allow multimedia (audio and video) files.

2. Usually, two types of free web hosting services as follows.

  • As a directory service: service provider’s website address/ our website address
    eg: www.facebook.com/bvmhsskalparamba
  • As a subdomain: Our website address. service providers website address
    eg: www.bvmhsskalparamba.facebook.com

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 4.
Recently more and more people are using Content Management Systems (CMS) for developing professional websites. What can be the reasons for this?
Answer:
CMS means Content Management System. Do you heard about Data Base Management System (DBMS). DBMS is a software (collection of programs) used to create, alter, modify, delete and retrieve records of a DataBase. Similarly CMS is a collection of programs that is used to create, modify, update and publish website contents.

CMS can be downloaded freely and is useful to design and manage attractive and interactive websites with the help of templates that are available in CMS. WordPress, Joomla, etc. are the examples of CMS.

Question 5.
Suggest a hosting type for the following websites given below. Justify.

  1. Website for a medical shop in your city.
  2. Website for Public Service Commission (PSC) of Kerala.
  3. Website for an online shopping facility.

Answer:

  1. Shared hosting
  2. Dedicated/VPS
  3. Dedicated/VPS

Question 6.
Consider that a college in your locality plans to shift its website from shared type of hosting to VPS hosting. List the advantages that the website will gain from this change.
Answer:
Virtual Private Server (VPS):
A VPS is a virtual machine sold as a service by an Internet hosting Service. A VPS runs its own copy of an OS(Operating System) and customers have super level access to that OS instance, so they can install almost any s/ w that runs on that OS.

This type is suitable for websites that require more features than shared hosting but less features than dedicated hosting.
Eg: It is similar to owning a Condo

Question 7.
Mr. Mohan wants to host a personal website with minimal cost. Which type of web hosting would you advise for him? Justify your answer.
Answer:
Shared Hosting:
This type of hosting sharing re-sources, like memory, disk space, and CPU hence the name shared. Several websites share the same server. This is suitable for small websites that have less traffic and it is not suitable for large websites that have large bandwidth, large storage space and have large volume of traffic.

Eg: Shared hosting is very similar to living in an Apartment(Villas) complex. All residents are in the same location and must share the available resources(Car parking area, Swimming pool, Gymnasium, playground, etc) with everyone.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 8.
A supermarket in a city wishes to take its business online. It plans to accept orders for its products through a website and receive payments online.

  1. Which type of hosting is suitable for this website?
  2. Explain the reason for your choice.

Answer:
1. Dedicated Hosting

2. A web server and its resources are exclusively for one website that have large volume of traffic means large volume of requests by the visitors. Some Govt, departments or large organizations require uninterrupted services for that round the clock power supply is needed. It is too expensive but it is more reliable and provides good service to the public.

Eg: It is similar to living in an Our own house. All the resources in your house is only for you. No one else’s account resides on the computer and would not be capable of tapping into your resourses

Question 9.
Emil wishes to purchase the web hosting space required to host a website for his medical shop. List the features to be taken into consideration while buying hosting space on a web server.
Answer:
Following factors to be considered:

  1. Buying sufficient amount of memory space for storing our website files
  2. If the web pages contain programming contents supporting technology must be considered
  3. Based upon the programs select Windows hosting or Linux hosting

Question 10.
How can we connect a website hosted in a Web server to a domain name?
Answer:
Millions of websites are available over Internet so that our website must be registered with a suitable name. Domain Name registration is used to identify a website over Internet. A domain name must be unique(i.e. no two websites with same name is available).

So you have to check the availability of domain name before you register it, for this www.whois.net website will help. If the domain name entered is available then we can register it by paying the Annual registration fees online. Consider a Post Office, it has two addresses one string address (Irinjalakuda) and one numeric(pin) code (680121).

Just like this the website has also two addresses a string address, for example, www.agker.cag.gov.in and a numeric address (http:/ /210.212.239.70/). We are following string address, hence this domain name has to be connected to the corresponding IP address of the webserver. This is done by using ‘A record’(Address record) of the domain. ‘A record’ is used to store the IP address and the corresponding domain name.

Question 11.
What is the advantage of using SFTP protocol in FTP software?
Answer:
FTP(File Transfer Protocol) client software:
When a client requests a website by entering website address. Then FTP client software helps to establish a connection between client computer and remote server computer. Unauthorised access is denied by using username and password hence secure our website files for that SSH(Secure Shell) FTP simply SFTP is used.

Instead of http://, it uses ftp://. By using FTP client s/w we can transfer(upload) the files from our computer to the web server by using the ‘drag and drop’ method. The popular FTP client software are FileZilla, CuteFTP, SmartFTP, etc.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 12.
Raju wishes to host a website for his family. What are the advantages that free web hosting companies provide?
Answer:
The name implies it is free of cost service and the expense is meet by the advertisements. Some service providers allow limited facilities such as limited storage space, do not allow multimedia(audio and video) files. A paid service website’s address is as follows:
Eg: www.bvmhsskalparamba.com

Usually two types of free web hosting services as follows:
1. As a directory service:
Service provider’s website address/ our website address.
eg: www.facebook.com / bvm hss kalparambu.

2. As a Sub domain:
Our website address.service providers website address.
eg: www.bvmhsskalparamba.facebook.com Earlier web hosting services are expensive but nowadays it is cheaper hence reduced the need for free web hosting.

Question 13.
What is CMS? What are the features of CMS? Give Examples.
Answer:
CMS means Content Management System. Do you heard about Data Base Management System (DBMS)? DBMS is a software(collection of programs) used to create, alter, modify, delete and retrieve records of a DataBase. Similarly, CMS is a collection of programs that is used to create, modify, update and publish website contents.

CMS can be downloaded freely and is useful to design and manage attractive and interactive websites with the help of templates that are available in CMS. WordPress, Joomla, etc. are examples of CMS.

Plus Two Computer Science Web Hosting Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Explain different types of web hosting?
Answer:
Types of web hosting:
Various types of web hosting services are available. We can choose the web hosting services according to our needs depends upon the storage space needed for hosting, the number of visitors expected to visit, etc.

1. Shared Hosting:
This type of hosting sharing resources, like memory, disk space, and CPU hence the name shared. Several websites share the same server. This is suitable for small websites that have less traffic and it is not suitable for large websites that have large bandwidth, large storage space and have large volume of traffic.

Eg: Shared hosting is very similar to living in an Apartment(Villas) complex. All residents are in the same location and must share the available resources(Car parking area, Swimming pool, Gymnasium, playground, etc) with everyone.

2. Dedicated Hosting:
A web server and its resources are exclusively for one website that have large volume of traffic means large volume of requests by the visitors. Some Govt, departments or large organizations require uninterrupted services for that round the clock power supply is needed. It is too expensive but it is more reliable and provides good service to the public.

Eg: It is similar to living in an Our own house. All the resources in your house is only for you. No one else’s account resides on the computer and would not be capable, of tapping into your resources.

3. Virtual Private Server (VPS):
A VPS is a virtual machine sold as a service by an Internet hosting Service. A VPS runs its own copy of an OS (Operating System) and customers have super level access to that OS instance, so they can install almost any s/what runs on that OS. This type is suitable for websites that require more features than shared hosting but less features than dedicated hosting.
Eg: It is similar to owning a Condo

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 2.

  1. What is responsive web design?
  2. Why is it gaining importance recently?

Answer:
1. The home page is displayed differently according to the screen size of the browser window (different screen sized devices mobile phone, palmtop, tablet, laptop, and desktop) we used. The website is designed dynamically (flexibly) that suit the screen size of different device introduced by Ethan Marcotte.

Before this, companies have to design different websites for different screen sized devices. By responsive web design, companies have to design only one website that suitably displayed according to the screen size of the devices. It is implemented by using flexible grid layout, images, and media queries.

  • Flexible grid layouts: It helps to set the size of the web page to fit the screen size of the device.
  • Flexible image and video: It helps to set the image or video dimension to fit the screen size of the device.
  • Media queries: There is an option (settings) to select the size of the web page to match our device, this can be done by using media queries inside the CSS file.

A well known Malayalam daily Malaysia Manorama launched their responsive website.

2. Instead of using desktops or laptops many people nowadays visit websites using tablets and mobile phones. Portability is the main reason for this.

Question 3.
Today, we visit websites using tablets and mobile phones also. You might have noticed that the same website is displayed in a different layout in different devices.

  1. Name the concept used for this.
  2. List and explain the technologies used for implementing this concept

Answer:
1. Responsive web design.

2. It is implemented by using flexible grid layout, images, and media queries:

  • Flexible grid layouts: It helps to set the size of the web page to fit the screen size of the device.
  • Flexible image and video: It helps to set the image or video dimension to fit the screen size of the device.
  • Media queries: There is an option (settings) to select the size of the web page to match our device, this can be done by using media queries inside the CSS file.

A well known Malayalam daily Malayala Manorama launched their responsive website.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 4.

  1. What is responsive web design?
  2. How is responsive web design implemented?

Answer:
1. The home page is displayed differently according to the screen size of the browser window (different screen sized devices mobile phone, palm top, tablet, laptop and desktop) we used. The website is designed dynamically (flexibly) that suit the screen size of different device introduced by Ethan Marcotte.

Before this, companies have to design different websites for different screen sized devices. By responsive web design, companies have to design only one website that suitably displayed according to the screen size of the devices.

2. It is implemented by using flexible grid layout, images, and media queries:

  • Flexible grid layouts: It helps to set the size of the web page to fit the screen size of the device.
  • Flexible image and video: It helps to set the image or video dimension to fit the screen size of the device.
  • Media queries: There is an option (settings) to select the size of the web page to match our device, this can be done by using media queries inside the CSS file.

A well known Malayalam daily Malayala Manorama launched their responsive website.

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Students can Download Chapter 2 Spread Sheet Questions and Answers, Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Plus Two Accountancy Spread Sheet One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The best way to get started in Libre Office calc is _____
Answer:
Application → Office → LibreOffice Calc

Question 2.
___________ is a configuration of rows and columns
Answer:
Spread sheet

Question 3.
A spread sheet is also known as ____________
(a) Work book
(b) Work area
(c) Work sheet
(d) Spread book
Answer:
(c) Work sheet

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 4.
____________ in spread sheet are horizontal vectors while ______ are vertical vectors
Answer:
Rows, columns

Question 5.
Spread sheet is used to
(a) Record data
(b) Calculate data
(c) Compare data
(d) All the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 6.
Each cell value can either be an independent (basic) value or it may be derived on the basis of ____________.
Answer:
Arithmetic expression or a function.

Question 7.
A file in LibreOffice Calc is known as a ______
(a) Work sheet
(b) Page
(c) Work book
(d) All the above
Answer:
(c) Work book

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 8.
A work book is a collection of a number of ______
Answer:
Work Sheets

Question 9.
Where is the address of the active cell displayed?
(a) Row heading
(b) Status Bar
(c) Name Box
(d) Formula Bar
Answer:
(c) Name Box

Question 10.
Which command reverses the last action performed in the worksheet?
(a) Cut
(b) Undo
(c) Redo
(d) Paste
Answer:
(b) Undo

Question 11.
__________ is a text or special character or descriptive information for rows or columns.
Answer:
Label

Question 12.
A formula must starts with a ___________ sign
(a) =
(b) >
(c) *
(d) {}
Answer:
(a) =

Question 13.
_______ Function is commonly used to get the addition of various numbers orthe contents of various cells.
Answer:
Autosum (Σ)

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 14.
The cell A5 indicate Column _______ and Row _____
Answer:
Column A & Row 5

Question 15.
The dark box which distinguishes the active cell is called _______
Answer:
Cell Pointer

Question 16.
One or more cells selected is called ______
Answer:
a range

Question 17.
Without the equal sign, the entry in a cell is treated as _________
(a) Text
(b) Label
(c) TextorLabel
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Text or Label

Question 18.
Libre Office calc has three type of cell entries, they are _______ , ______and _______
Answer:
Value, Label and Formula.

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 19.
Which command allows you to reverse an undo command?
(a) Redo
(b) Repeat
(c) Reset
(d) Reverse
Answer:
(a) Redo

Question 20.
Which cell alignment is assigned to most values by default?
(a) Right
(b) Left
(c) Centre
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Left

Question 21.
Which function automatically totals a column or row of Values?
(a) TOTAL
(b) ADD
(c) SUM
(d) AVG
Answer:
(c) SUM

Question 22.
Which Mathematical Operator is represented by an asterisk (*)
(a) Exponentiation (square)
(b) Addition
(c) Subtraction
(d) Multiplication
Answer:
(d) Multiplication

Question 23.
How many blank work sheets are shown when a new workbook is created?
(a) One
(b) Two
(c) Three
(d) Four
Answer:
(c) Three

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 24.
The cell co-ordinate in the formula are known as ………….
Answer:
cell references

Question 25.
IF function is …………….
Answer:
Logical function

Question 26.
The cell references for cell range of G2to M12 is …………….
(a) G2.M12
(b) G2: M12
(c) G2; M12
(d) G2 – M12
Answer:
(c) G2: M12

Question 27.
If 4/6 entered in a cell without applying any format, LibreOffice Calc will treat this as
(a) Fraction
(b) Number
(c) Text
(d) Date
Answer:
(d) Date

Question 28.
The cell labelled F5 refers to …………….
(a) Row F column 5
(b) Column F row 5
(c) Function available in cells
(d) Function key F5
Answer:
(b) Column F row 5

Question 29.
LibreOffice Calc is a FOSS. What is FOSS?
Answer:
Free and Open Source Software.

Question 30.
Which among the following is not a spreadsheet software.
(a) MS Office Excel
(b) Open Office Spredsheet
(c) Libre Office Calc
(d) MS Office Word
Answer:
(d) M S Office Word

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 31.
How many worksheets can be made as active worksheet at a time?
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4
Answer:
(a) 1

Question 32.
The name of the worksheet will be shown in the ______ at the bottom left of the windows.
Answer:
Sheet Tab

Question 33.
To add column in a worksheet, click __________, there we get an option to add column.
Answer:
Column Header

Question 34.
A ………… is identified by a combination of a column header (letter) and a row header (number)
Answer:
cell

Question 35.
_______ is a group of adjacent cells that forms a rectangular area.
Answer:
Range

Question 36.
Which among the following is used as the range operator
(a) ;
(b) :
(c) /
(d) #
Answer:
(b) :

Question 37.
One ENTER key stroke means
(a) One cell down
(b) One cell up
(c) One cell right
(d) One cell left
Answer:
(a) One cell down

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 38.
………………. Function counts the number of cells which contain any value.
(COUNT, COUNTA, COUNT BLANK, COUNTIF)
Answer:
COUNTA

Plus Two Accountancy Spread Sheet Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Match the following

AB
1. Rows1. Intersection of a row & a column
2. Columns2. Numerical numbers from top to bottom
3. Cell3. Unique identification code of a cell
4. Cell address4. Alpha characters from left to right

Answer:

AB
1. Rows1. Numerical numbers from top to bottom
2. Columns2. Alpha characters from left to right
3. Cell3. Intersection of a row & a column
4. Cell address4. Unique identification code of a cell

Question 2.
What do you mean by spreadsheet?
Answer:
Spreadsheet:
Spreadsheet application is a computer program that allows to record, calculate and compare numerical or financial data. Using a spreadsheet program. We can store a lot of data in the worksheet and also arrange and analyse the data by using different functions and formulae for the meaningful object.

It is used to establish relationship between two or more sets of data. Libre Office Calc, MS Office Excel, Open Office Spreadsheet etc. are examples of spreadsheet software.

Question 3.
Give a short note on

  1. Work book
  2. Work sheet

Answer:
1. Workbook:
A file in spread sheet is known as a workbook. A work book is a collection of a number of work sheets.

2. Work sheets:
The work area which consists of rows and columns in a spreadsheet is called a worksheet. By default three work sheets-sheet 1, sheet -2, sheet -3 are available in work book.

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 4.
Explain about rows and columns in Libre Office Calc?
Answer:
1. Rows:
Rows are the horizontal vectors in the worksheet. These are numbered numerically from Top to Bottom.

2. Columns:
Columns are vertical vectors in the worksheet. These are referred by alpha characters from left to right such as A, B, C, …, AA, AB, AC …etc.

Question 5.
What do you mean be Relative cell Reference?
Answer:
1. Relative Cell references:
By default cell reference is relative; which means that as a formula or function is copied and pasted to other cells, the cell references in the formula or function change to reflect the new location.

Question 6.
Define the following

  1. Label
  2. Formula

Answer:
1. Labels:
Descriptive information for rows or columns in the form of a text or a special character is called Label.
Eg: Name, Roll No, Address.

2. Formula:
The formula means a mathematical calculation on a set of cells. The formula must start with an = (equal to) sign. When a cell contains a formula, it often contains reference to other cells. Eg:= Basic pay + DA + HRA

Question 7.
List down any two features fo Spreadsheet.
Answer:

  • A spreadsheet is a configuration of rows and columns.
  • A spreadsheet is also known as worksheet.

Question 8.
Name the different spreadsheet software available.
Answer:
LibreOffice Calc, MS Office Excel, Open Office Spreadsheet.

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 9.
Briefly explain any two Date and Time functions availabe in LibreOffice Calc
Answer:
1. TODAY():
It is the function for today’s date in the worksheet. This helps to update the date value when we reopen the spreadsheet or modify the values of the document
Syntax: =TODAY()

2. NOW ():
It is the function for today’s date and present time. This helps to update the date and the time value when the cell value is modified.
Syntax: =NOW()

Question 10.
Give the Syntax for

  1. YEAR()
  2. DATE()

Answer:
1. YEAR()
Syntax: = YEAR (Date value) OR = YEAR (“Date”)

2. DATE()
Syntax: = DATE (Year, Month, Day)

Question 11.
Complete the table by using ROUNDUP()
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 1
Answer:

  1. 1880
  2. 1900

Question 12.
What are the Text Manipulation Function in LibreOffice Calc
Answer:

  • TEXT
  • CONCATENATE

Question 13.
Give the explanation of the following errors
Error Message

  1. # DIV/o!
  2. VALUE!

Answer:

  1. # DIV/0! → When a number is divided by zero
  2. VALUE! → When a wrong argument is given in a fromula

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 14.
Spot the correct pairs by observing the nature of software, and give justification
(a) Microsoft Excel and LibreOffice Calc
(b) Linux and Tata Ex.
(c) Windows and MS Office
(d) GINUGhata and Microsoft Access
Answer:
(a) Microsoft Excel and LibreOffice Calc. Both are spread sheet packages.

Plus Two Accountancy Spread Sheet Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What are the advantage of Libre Office Calc?
Answer:

  1. It is both free software and open source software.
  2. It can be used to calculate, analyse and manage data.
  3. Libre Office Calc is available for a variety of platforms including Linux, OSX, Microsoft windows and Free BSD.

Question 2.
Give the cell address or range reference in the following situations.

  1. Cell at 10th column and 6th row.
  2. Cell at 27th column and 15th row.
  3. Range starting from 5th column, 9throw and spread till 12th column and 15th row.

Answer:

  1. Cell at 10th column and 6th row = J6.
  2. Cell at 27th column and 15th row = AA15.
  3. Range starting from 5th column, 9th row and spread till 12th column and 15th row = E9: L15.

Question 3.

  1. What is FOSS?
  2. What are the benefits of using FOSS?

Answer:

  1. FOSS means Free and Open Source Software
  2. The benefits of using FOSS:
    • Decreased software costs.
    • Increased Security and stability.
    • Any one can use, copy, study and change the software in any manner.
    • Source code is openly shared.

Question 4.
How can we save Libre Office Calc file?
Answer:
Step 1: Go to the File menu
File menu

Step 2: Click on Save
Save

OR

Step 1: & Step 2 – Press Ctrl + S
Ctrl + S

Step 3: Type the file in the name field instead of default name Untitled 1
Name field

Step 4: Choose the place where we want to save the new file.

Step 5: Click on Save

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 5.
Write the steps to be followed to

  1. Rename a worksheet
  2. Delete a worksheet
  3. Copy a worksheet

Answer:
1. Rename a worksheet:
Step – 1 Select the work sheet in the Sheet Tab which we want to Rename.

Step – 2 Right click and select Rename sheet from the drop up menu

Step – 3 Type new name in the Name field and press OK button

2. Delete a worksheet:
Step – 1 Select the worksheet in the Sheet Tab which we want to delete

Step – 2 Right click and select Delete sheet from the drop up menu

Step – 3 Click on Yes to the conformation question.

3. Copy a worksheet:
Step – 1 Click on blank rectangle Top left corner of the worksheet (Range Adress A1: AM J1048576)

Step – 2 Move the curser inside the worksheet and Right click the mouse.

Step – 3 Click on Copy from the dropdown menu.

Step – 4 Open the worksheet where we want to copy the sheet

Step – 5 Right click on cell A1. Click on Paste.

Question 6.
Give the cell address or range reference in the following situations.

  1. Cell of 10th column and 9th row
  2. Range starting from 2nd column 4th row and spread till 8th column 12th row
  3. Range starting from 4th column 5th row and spread till 10thcolumn 15th row

Answer:

  1. J9
  2. B4: H12
  3. D5: J15

Question 7.
What is the purpose of the COUNTIF function?
Answer:
COUNTIF():
This function counts the number of cells within a given that meet the criteria or condition.
Syntax: = COUNTIF (Range, Criteria)

Question 8.
Write the command to calculate the State Life Insurance Premium (SLI) of an employee using IF Function. The condition is SLI Premium Rs. 500/-below Basic Pay (BP) of Rs. 15000/- and for others Rs. 800/- (BP is given in cell C3)
Answer:
= IF(C3 < 15000, 500, 800)

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 9.
4 numbers are entered in Libre Office Calc spreadsheet starting from cell A1 to A4. Write any two formulae for getting total of those numbers in the cell A5

Answer:

  1. A5 = A1 + A2 + A3 + A4
  2. A5 = Σ(A1 : A4)

Question 10.
For preparation of Payslip of an employee, Govind entered Basic Pay in cell B2 of a worksheet in LibreOffice calc. The D.A. is 76% of Basic Pay and Gross Salary is the sum of Basic Pay and DA. In order to calculate the amount of DA in cell C2 and Gross salary in cell D2, what entries are to be made?
Answer:
Basic Pay → B2
DA → C2
Gross salary → D2
C2 = B2 * 76%
D2 = B2 + C2

Question 11.
Consider the following features of a software tool. Identify the software.

  1. It can be used as a text editor
  2. List out the important uses of this software

Answer:

  1. LibreOffice calc has the above mentioned features.
  2. Importance of LibreOffice calc.
    • It can be used for the preparation of statement of depreciation.
    • It can be used for preparation of Payroll of employees.
    • It can be used for the preparation of the loan re-payment schedule.

Question 12.
Complete the following.

  1. One cell down → arrow key
  2. One cell up → …………………………
  3. One cell left → …………………………
  4. One cell right → ………………………

Answer:

2. Up arrow key
3. Left arrow key
4. Right arrow key

Question 13.
Can you give some key navigations and short cut in LibreOffice calc?
Answer:
Spreadsheet navigation:
We can move around a worksheet through four arrow keys

  1. Left-arrow key
  2. Right arrow key
  3. Up arrow key
  4. Down arrow key

The mouse can also be used for navigation in a spreadsheet except for data entry. Some common operations/navigations are listed below:

MovementKeystroke (Press Key)
One cell upUp arrow key/ Shift + Enter key
One cell downDown arrow key/ Enter key
One cell rightRight arrow key/ Tab key
One cell leftLeft arrow key / Shift + Tab key
Top of sheet (Cell A1)Ctrl + Home Key
Move to last cell containing dataCtrl + End Key
Move to beginning of the RowHome Key or Ctrl + Left arrow key
Move to last filled cell in columnEnd key

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 14.
What commands are used to insert a column and delete a column in LibreOffice Calc?
Answer:
1. To insert a column:
To insert a column click a cell in the column immediately to the right of where you want to insert the new column. Then on the Insert menu, click Columns.

2. To delete a column:
Select the column you want to delete. On the Edit menu, click Delete.

Question 15.
Give the procedure to insert a new worksheet and to delete a worksheet.
Answer:
To insert a new worksheet, right click the worksheet, select ‘insert’. To delete a worksheet, select the sheet you want to delete and ‘click delete sheet’ on the edit menu.

Question 16.
Give the cell address or range reference in the following situations.

  1. Cell at 12th Column and 8th row.
  2. Range starting from 6th Column 10th row and spread till 12th Column and 16th row.

Answer:

  1. L8.
  2. F10: L16

Question 17.
Name the appropriate Statistical functions.

  1. Number of cells contain numbers.
  2. Number of cells contain any value.
  3. Number of empty cell.
  4. Number of cells that meet the given criteria.

Answer:

  1. COUNT
  2. COUNTA
  3. COUNTBLANK
  4. COUNTIF

Question 18.
What is the use of financial function ACCRINT in LibreOffice Calc
Answer:
ACCRINT ():
This function returns the accrued interest for a security that pays periodic interest.
Syntax: = ACCRINT(Issue, First_Interest, settlement, rate, Par, frequency, basis, calc_method)

Question 19.
Explain the difference between relative cell reference and absolute cell reference?
Answer:
1. Relative Cell references:
By default cell reference is relative; which means that as a formula or function is copied and pasted to other cells, the cell references in the formula or function change to reflect the new location.

2. Absolute Cell reference:
The absolute cell reference consists of the column letter and row number surrounded by dollar ($) signs. Eg $A$5. An absolute cell reference is used when we want a cell reference to stay fixed on a specific cell.

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 20.
What is the use of PIVOT TABLE?
Answer:
Preparation of reports using Pivot Tables:
A Pivot Table is a way to present information in a report format. A Pivot Table report provides enhanced layout, attractive and formatted report with improved readability. There are two types of data table.

  1. One-Variable Data Table (One – Variable )
  2. Two-Variable Data Table (Two-Variable)
    • The one variable Data Table allows us to identify a single decision variable in our model and see how changing the values for that variable affects the values calculated by one or more formulas in our model.
    • The two variable Data table allows us to specify two decision variables and a variety of inputs and only a single formula.

Plus Two Accountancy Spread Sheet Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Define the following

  1. Cell
  2. Range
  3. Worksheet
  4. Workbook

Answer:
1. Cell:
The intersection of a row and a column is called a cell. A cell is identified by a combination of an alpha – numeric character eg: A1, B6, C10, etc. This alpha numeric character is called cell address. Hence each cell has a unique address.

2. Ranges:
Range is a group of adjacent cells that forms a rectangular area. A range is specified by giving the address for first cell in range and the last cell in the rage, eg: range starting from A10 to A20 is written as A10: A20 where colon (:) is the range operator.

3. Work sheets:
The work area which consists of rows and columns in a spreadsheet is called worksheet. By default three worksheets-sheet 1, sheet -2, sheet -3 are available in work book.

4. Workbook:
A file in spread sheet is known as a workbook. A work book is a collection of a number of work sheets.

Question 2.
What are the different spreadsheet reference functions in Libre Office Calc?
Answer:
Spreadsheet Reference Functions:
The important spreadsheet reference functions are

1. LOOKUP () functions:
The LOOKUP function returns a value either from a one-row or one-column range or from an array. The lookup function has two syntax forms: Vector form and Array form.

The vector form of LOOUP looks in a one-row or one column range (known as a vector) for a value, and then returns a value from the same position in a second one-row or one-column range.

The array form of LOOKUP looks in the first row or column of an array for the specified value, and then returns a value from the same position in the last row or column of the array.

LOOKUP (Vector from)
Syntax: = LOOKUP (search criterion, Search vector, Result vector)
LOOKUP (Array form)
Syntax: =(LOOKUP (lookup_value, array)

2. VLOOK UP ():
VLOOK UP is the vertical LOOKUP function. Use VLOOK UP to search the first column (columns are vertical) of a block of data and return the value from another column in the same row.
Syntax: = VLOOKUP (Search criterion; Array; Index; Sort Order)

3. HLOOKUP ( ):
It is the Horizontal LOOKUP function, searches for a value in the first row of a table array and returns the corresponding value in the same column from another row of the same table array.
Syntax: HLOOKUP (search criteria; index; sorted)

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 3.
Give the cell address or range reference in the following situations.

  1. Cell at 10th Column and 9th row.
  2. Range starting from 2nd Column 4th row and spread till 8th Column and 12th row.

Answer:

  1. J9.
  2. B4: H12

Question 4.
What are the logical functions in LibreOffice Calc
Answer:
Logical Functions:
Logical functions are used for comparison and checking a test condition. The major logical functions are IF, AND and OR.

Question 5.
Explain the steps involved to insert a new work sheet in LibreOffice Calc
Answer:
Steps involved to insert a new work sheet in LibreOffice Calc.
Step 1 – Click on the [+] button in the sheet Tab

OR

Step 1 – Click on the work sheet in the sheet Tab Sheet Tab

Step 2 – Right click the mouse

Step – 3 Select insert sheet from the Drop up menu box
Drop up

Step 4- Add number of sheets and give name, press
OK

Question 6.
You are required to prepare a rank list for admission to the B.Com course. The Index mark is calculated as follows.
Sum of mark secured in Plus 2, Mark obtained in Accountancy and -25% of Mark obtained in Business studies. Give the entries in Libre Office Calc to get the index mark.
Answer:

  • A1 → Total Mark
  • B1 → Mark in Accountancy
  • C1 → Mark in Business Studies
  • D1 → Index Mark
  • A2 → Enter the Marks
  • B2 → Enter the Marks
  • C2 → Enter the Marks
  • D2 → =A2 + B2 + (C2 * 25%)

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 7.
Match the following:

AB
1. One cell to the left1. Right arrow key
2. To cell A12. Ctrl + End
3. One cell to the right3. Ctrl + Home
4. To the last cell in the worksheet that contains data4. Shift + Tab

Answer:

AB
1. One cell to the left1. Shift + Tab
2. To cell A12. Ctrl + Home
3. One cell to the right3. Right arrow key
4. To the last cell in the work sheet that contains data4. Ctrl + End

Question 8.
The monthly sales of a company for the first six months are given below:

AB
1. January25000
2. February15000
3. March28000
4. April32000
5. May20000
6. June30000
  1. Find the total sales for the six months
  2. Find the average sales of the six months
  3. Find the lowest sales of the six months
  4. Find the highest sales of the six months

Answer:

AB
7. Total sales= SUM (B1:B6)
8. Average sales= Average (B1:B6)
9. Lowest sales= MIN (B1:B6)
10. Highest sales= MAX(B1:B6)

Question 9.
Give the range reference in the following cases.

  1. Range beginning from 1st column, 1st row and ending 16th column, 8th row
  2. Range beginning from 5th column, 7th Row and ending 27th column, 37th row

Answer:

  1. A1: P8
  2. E7: AA37

Question 10.
Match the following:

AB
a) Todaya) Today’s date & Time
b) Nowb) Convert date into corresponding value
c) Dayc) Today’s date
d) Date valued) Day of the data referred in the formula

Answer:

AB
a) Todaya) Today’s date
b) Nowb) Today’s date & time
c) Dayc) Day of the date referred in the formula
d) Date valued) Convert date into corresponding value

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 11.
Give the cell address or range reference in the following situations

  1. Cell at 8th column and 10th row
  2. Cell at 27th column and 6th row
  3. Range starting from 5th column, 9th row and spread till 12th column and 15th row

Answer:

  1. H10
  2. AA6
  3. E9: L15

Question 12.
What are the steps to be followed for naming cells and ranges.
Answer:
Step 1 – Select the cells or ranges that are to be named.

Step 2 – Select Define Range from the Data menu Data.

Step 3 – This will display a dialogue box us “Define Database Range”. It will provide a place to enter “Name”.

Step 4 – Click OK on the dialogue box.

Plus Two Accountancy Spread Sheet Practical Lab Work Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The following marks are obtained by 8 students in an examination.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 2
Ascertain the grade obtained by students based on the following criteria
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 3
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open Libre Office Cal work sheet
Applications → Office → Libre Office calc

Step 2 – Enter the data in the given cells
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 4
Step 3 – Enter the following formula in cell D2
= IF(C2 < 30, “FAIL”, IF(C2 < 40, “D+”, IF(C2 < 50, “C”, IF(C2<60, “C+”, IF(C2 < 70, “B”, IF (C2 < 80, “B+”, IF(C2 < 90, “A”, IF(C2 < 100, “A+”))))))))

Step 4 – Drag the formula to D9
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 5

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 2.
The sales made by 6 salesmen during three months are given below. You are required to prepare a statement showing the total sales of each salesman and total sales of the firm.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 6
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice calc worksheet
Applications → Office → LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the following data in the given cells
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 7
Step 3 – Enter the given formula in cell E2 = B2 + C2 + D2

Step 4 – Drag the formula to E7 to get the total sales of each salesman

Step 5 – Enter the given formula in cell E8 to get the total sales of the firm = SUM (E2: E7)
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 8

Question 3.
The monthly production of a company are given below

MonthProduction (Units)
January25000
February20000
March22000
April18000
May19000
June24000

 

  1. Find the total production for the six months
  2. Find the average production of the six months
  3. Find the number of months during the period
  4. Find the lowest production of the six months
  5. Find the highest production of the six months

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice Calc worksheet
Applications → Office → LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the following data in the given cells
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 9

Step 3 – Enter the following formula in the given cells

B8 = SUM (B2:B7)
B9       = AVERAGE(B2: B7)
B10     = COUNT (B2:B7)
B11= MIN (B2:B7)
B 12= MAX (B2:B7)

Output:

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 10

Question 4.
For the recruitment of managers in different departments of a company, Applicant’s age should be greater than 35 and less than 45 as on 31/03/2018. Write the Spreadsheet statement to test when a candidate is eligible for recruitment or not, when his/ her date of birth is entered in a cell as input
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice Calc Spread sheet.
Applications → Office → LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the given data in the following cells
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 11
Step 3 – Enter the date of birth in cell B2

Step 4 – Enter the following formula in cell B3 = Round ((B1-B2)/365,0). Then the age will display in the cell B3.

Step 5 – Enter the following formula in cell B4 to test the eligibility of the candidate = IF(B3<35, “Not eligible”, IF(B3>45, “Not eligible”, “Eligible”)

OR

= IF (AND (B>34, B3<46), “Eligible”, “Not eligible”)
Note: The data value entered in cell B2 and B3 are to be formatted as “Date”

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 5.
The given table shows name of employees, Designation and monthly salary paid for different employees in Jose Traders.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 12
Find out the following:

  1. The total monthly salary by naming range (TOTAL SALARY)
  2. The total monthly salary paid to marketing managers (MM) in the firm
  3. The name of employees with a monthly salary of Rs.30000 by using LOOK UP function.

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice Calc worksheet
Applications → Office → LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the data in the appropriate cells
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 13
Step 3 – Naming a range
Select the range which shows monthly salary ie C2: C7 click on “Data” from the menu bar. Select “Define Range” Type the name “TOTAL_SALARY” in the name box and press OK or Enter key

Select the Range (C2: C7) → Data → Define Ranges Type TOTAL_SALARY. Press OK/Enter Key

Step 4 – Enter the following formulas in respective cells .

B8= SUM (TOTAL_SALARY)
B9        = SUMIF(B2:B7, “MM”, C2:C7)
B10             = LOOKUP(30000, C2:C7, A2:A7)

Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 14

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 6.
The following Data is given in the form of a Table.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 15

  • How many cells contain numbers only?
  • How many cells contain any value?
  • Count the number of cells containing the value exceeding 500.
  • How many blank cells are there in the table?

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice Calc
Applications → Office → LibreOffice Calc

Step 2- Enter the given details in appropriate cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 16
Step 3 – Enter the given details and formula in the Following cells.

Step 3 – Enter the given details and formula in the
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 17
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 18

Question 7.
The following details are given
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 19
Find out

  • Find the name of student whose admission number is 8267
  • Look up value 8136 and locate the fee paid status by using VLOOKUP
  • Look up the name of student against admission number 8124
  • Ad. No. of student who paid fee Rs. 580

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice Calc worksheet
Application → Office → LibreOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the details in the given cells
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 20
Step 3 – Enter the given details and formula in the following cells

A
8Name of student Ad.No.8267
9Fee paid status of Ad No.8136
10Name of student Ad. No.8124
11Ad.No. of student, paid Rs.580
B
8= LOOKUP(8267,A2:A7,B2:B7)
9= VLOOKUP(8136,A2:C7,3,0)
10= LOOKUP(8124,A2:A7,B2:B7)
11= VLOOKUP (8370,A2:C7,3,0)

Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet practical mark q7 img 5

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 8.
The marks in Accountancy of some students are given below.

NameMark
Priya89
Indira-ab-
Sindhu56
Reny64
Beena49
Bindhu50
Resmi-ab-

Calculate:

  1. Number of students in the class
  2. Number of students appeared in the Accountancy examination
  3. Total marks in Accountancy examination
  4. Average Marks in Accountancy examination
  5. Lowest mark in Accountancy
  6. Highest mark in Accountancy

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice Calc Work sheet
Application → Office → LibreOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the given data in appropriate cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 21

Step 3 – Enter the following details and formula in the given cells


Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 23

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 9.
Mark summary of some students are given below.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 24
Calculate

  1. Number of cells containing 90 marks
  2. Count the number of paper scored less than 40
  3. Find the result of each student. (Pass or Fail) minimum mark required to pass is 30

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice Calc worksheet
Application → Office → LibreOffice calc

Step 2 – Enter the given data in appropriate cells
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 25

Step3 – Enter the following details and formula in appropriate cells

A8Number of cells containing 90 mark
B8= COUNTIF(B2: G7, “90”)
A9Count the number of paper scored less than 40 Mark
B9= COUNTIF(B2: G7, “40”)

Step4 – Find the result of the student

1ststep – Count the number of marks less than 30 scored by each student For this,
Enter the formula in H2 =COUNT IF (B2: G2, “<30”)
Drag the equation to H7

2nd step – Based on the result in H2: H7 range, we can find out the result in I2 cell by giving the following formula
=IF(H2 = 0, “PASS”, “FAIL”)
Drag (Copy) the formula to I7
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 26

Question 10.
List of debtors and creditors, and the amount due from them are given below
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 27
Calculate the total amount of receivables and payables using SUMIF functions.
Procedure:
Step -1 Open Libre Office Calc worksheet
Applications → Office → LibreOffice calc

Step 2 – Enter the details in the given cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 28
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 29

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 11.
Calculate Income Tax of following employees based on the following criteria.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 30
Conditions

  1. Tax rate is 40% of Total taxable Income.
  2. For male, standard deduction is 150,000 3 For female, if taxable income is less than or equal to Rs.4,00,000, then the standard deduction is 2,00,000, otherwise 1,50,000

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice Calc worksheet
Application → Office → LibreOffice calc

Step 2 – Enter the given details in the given range
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 31

Step 3 – Calculation of Tax
Enter the formula in D2 cell and drag with the fill handle up to D8
= IF(B2 = “Male”, (C2 – 150000)*40%, IF (AND(C2 = “Female”, C2 <= 400000), (C2 – 200000)*40%, (C2 – 150000)*40%))
Output:

Name of EmployeeTax
Manoj60,000
Praveena1,20,000
Naveen2,20,000
Riya2,08,000
Rohit1,40,000
Latha80,000
Arya2,84,000

Question 12.
For SI selection in Kerala polices there is a physical test, which consists of three items. A candidate has to qualify ANY ONE of the three tests to qualify for the final. The standard for the physical test is given below.

  • Shot put: 5 meters or above.
  • Ball throws 50 meters.
  • 500-meter race within 5 minutes.

The following data is furnished:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 32
Check whether the candidates quality or not.
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice Calc worksheet
Application → Office → LibreOffice calc

Step 2 – Enter the details in the form of a Table
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 33
Step 3 – Enter the following formula in F2 and drag with fill up to F6 = IF(OR(C2>=5, D2>=50, E2<=5), ‘‘Qualified”, “Not Qualified”)
Output:

Chest No.Result
203Qualified
216Qualified
275Qualified
304Not Qualified
361Qualified

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 13.
Calculate DAY, MONTH and YEAR of 36525 Procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice Calc worksheet.

Step 2 – Enter the details in appropriate cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 34
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 35

Question 14. Calculate the Date value of 28/10/1978/
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice calc work sheet
Application → Office → LibreOffice Calc

Step-2 – Enter the given details in Cell A1 = DATEVALUE (“28/10/1978”)
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 36

Question 15.
Find the age of Resi Jos based on her date of birth and today’s date Date of birth 06-05-1981.
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open Libre office Calc work sheet Application officer LibreOffice calc

Step 2 – Enter the following details in appropriate cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 37
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 38

Question 16.
Below is given the table showing the name, department, and salary paid for different employees
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 39

  • Find number of employees in the firm.
  • Find number of employees in Production Department.
  • Find the total monthly salary paid in Purchase Department.
  • Find the total monthly salary paid in Finance Department.

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank work sheet in LibreOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the following details as given below.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 40
Step 3 – Enter the following text in different cells as given below.

CellText
A9No. of employees in the firm
A10No. of employees in the production department
A11Total monthly salary paid in purchase depart­ment
A12Total monthly salary paid in finance depart­ment

Step 4 – Enter the following formula in different cells as given below.

CellFormula
B9= COUNTA(A2: A8)
B10= COUNTIF(B2: B8, “Production”)
B11= SUMIF (B2: B8, “Purchase”, C2: C8)
B12= SUMIF (B2: B8, “Finance”, C2: C8)

Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 41

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 17.
Below is given the table showing the Name, Department, and Salary paid for different employees.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 42

  • Name the employee name column as “Emp Name”, Department column as “Dept” and monthly salary column as “Salary”.
  • Find the total monthly salary.

procedure:
Step 1 – Open a blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the following details in respective cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 43
Step 3 – Select the range A2: A6, From the Data tool menu, select “Define Range” and – give name as “ Emp Name” and click (OK) button.

Step 4 – Select the range B2: B6, From the Data tool menu, select “Define Range” and give name as “Dept” and click (OK) button.

Step 5 – Select the range C2: C6, From the Data tool menu, select “Define Range” and give name as “Salary” and click (OK) button.

Step 6 – Enter the following formula to find out the total monthly salary.

CellText / Formula
A 7          Total Monthly Salary
B 7= SUM (Salary)

Output:

Total Monthly Salary12500

Question 18.
Below is given the table showing the Name, Class, and Fees due to different students.

  • Find out the total fees due from the students.
  • Find the average amount of fees
  • Find the highest amount of fees
  • Find the lowest amount of fees

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 44
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the following details in the worksheet as follows.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 45
Step 3 – Enter the following text in respective cells.

CellText
A9Total Fees due
A10Average Fees
A11Highest amount of fees
A12Lowest amount of fees

Step 4 – Enter the following formula in respective cells

CellFormula
B9= SUM (D2: D8)
B10      = Average (D2: D8)
B11= Max (D2;D8)
B12= Min (D2: D8)

Output:

Total Fees Due2700
Average Fees386
Highest Amount of Fees625
Lowest Amount of Fees60

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 19.
From the given values, calculate the following:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 46

  • Find the number of values
  • Find the total sum of the values
  • Find the average
  • Find the largest value
  • Find the smallest value

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the values in the work sheet as follows.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 47
Step 3 – Enter the following text in the respective cells.

CellText
A8             Number of values
A9              Sum of the values
A10Average
AH        Largest value
A12        Smallest value

Step 4 – Enter the following formula in the respective cells.

CellFormula
B8      = COUNT (A1: A7)
B9= SUM(A1: A7)
B10       = AVERAGE/A1: A7)
B11= MAX/A1: A7)
B12= MIN(A1: A7)

Output:

Number of values7
Sum of the values3000
Average429
Largest value700
Smallest value200

Question 20.
Prepare a statement showing advance tax collected form the employees @ 10% of the yearly salary from those who receive Rs. 500000 or more.

EmployeesYearly salary
Fijo855000
Joshy650000
Roby720000
Bose425000
Prince570000
Binoy380000

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LiberOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the following details in respective cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 48
Step 3 – Select the range A2: A7, From Data Tools menu, select ‘Name a Range’ and give name as “Employees” and click (OK) button.

Step 4 – Enter the text /formula in the following cells.

C
1Advance Tax
2= IF (B2>=500000, B2*10%, 0)
3
4
5
6
7

Step 5 – Copy formula to C3: C7 to the last employee.

Step 6 – Enter “Total Advance Tax” in cell B8 and enter the formula ‘‘SUM C2: C7” to get total amount.
Output:

Fijo85500
Joshy65000
Roby72000
Prince57000

Question 21.
Mrs. Leela, the class teacher is analysing the performance of her students in a class test.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 49
Find out

  • Total number of students
  • Number of students appeared in the class test
  • Number of students with no grade
  • Number of A+ holders
  • Number of B grade holders.

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LiberOfficeCalc

Step 2 – Enter the following details in the respective cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 50
Step 3 – Enter the text /formula in the corresponding
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 51
Output:

Total number of students8
Students appeared in-class test6
Students with no grade2
Number of A+ holders2
Number of B grade holders1

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 22.
The monthly sales effected by 6 salesmen are given below.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 52
Calculate the commission earned by each salesman on the basis of the following rules.

Total salesCommission
Less than 8000Nil
8000- 100005%
10000- 120008%
More than 1200010%

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the following details in the respective cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 53
Step 3 – Enter the formula = SUM (B2: D2) in cell E2 to get the total sales. Copy the formula to the last employee.

Step 4 – Enter the formula = IF (E2 >= 12000, E2 * 10%, IF (E2 >= 10000, E2*8%, IF(E2 >= 8000, E2 * 5%,0)))
Copy the formula to the last employee.
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 54

Question 23.
ABC Ltd categorises their salesmen into four on the basis of sales targets achieved in each quarter. The criteria and sales are given below.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 55
Performance criteria
Total sales – Grade
More than 100000 – Excellent
50000-100000 – Good
30000-50000 – Average
Less than 30000 – Bad
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the following details in the respective cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 56
Step 3 – Enter the formula in E2 to get total sales = SUM (B2: D2)
Copy the formula to the last employee.

Step 4 – Enter the formula in F2 to get the commission = IF(E2 >= 100000, “EXCELLENT”, IF (E2 >= 50000, “GOOD”, IF (E2 >= 30000, “AVERAGE”, “BAD”)))
Copy the formula to the last employee.
Output:

RameshBAD
SureshGOOD
MaheshAVERAGE
RajeshGOOD
SukeshGOOD

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 24.
Below is given the name and address of some students. Combine and show details in an address format using CONCATENATE function.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 57
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LiberOffice Calc
Application → Office → LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the following details in appropriate cells
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 58
Step 3 – Enter the following formula in F2 cell = CONCATENATE (A2, “ ”, B2, “ ”, C2, “ ”, D2, “ ”, E2)

Step – 4 Copy down the formula up to the row of the last employee.
Output:

Address
Sanjan Kollannur Kechery 680579.
Shaji Amala Bhavan Ollur 680514 Thrissur.
Nithin MRA/258 Mannuthy 680007 Ernakulam.

Question 25.
Mr Venugoapl is planning to invest Rs. 10000 in the beginning of each year in an annual investment scheme. The interest rate is 8% and the term of the scheme is 10 years. Using FV function, find out how much amount he will get at the expiry of the scheme.
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LiberOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the given detials and formula in diffemt cells
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 59
Output:

Future value156454.87

Question 26.
Anakha Ltd. wants to select one machinery, out of the two alternatives available on the basis of net present value. The cost and inflows of these machineries are given below.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 60
Assuming annual interest rate of 10%, find out net present values of these two machineries.
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a blank work sheet in LiberOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the following details in respective cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 61
Step 3 – Enter the formula = NPV (10%, C2:F2) – B2 in G2 to get the net present value of semi automatic machinery.
Copy the formula to G3
Output:

MachineryNPV
Semi-Automatic4683.42
Fully Automatic52891.2

Question 27.
Calculate Net Present Value (NPV) from the following data

Cost of Machinery2000000
Cash inflows -1 year60000
Cash inflows – II year80000
Cash inflows – III year82000
Cost of capital12%

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the following details in the respective cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 62
Step 3 – Enter the formula in B6 = NPV (12%, B2:B4)-B1 to get NPV
Output:

Net Present value24287.08

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 28.
Write the Libre Office Calc formula to multiply a given number entered in a cell with the following conditions

  • If the cell value is less than 20, then multiply by 1
  • If the cell value is greater than or equal to 20 but less than 40, then multiply by 2
  • If the cell value is greater than or equal to 40 but less than 80, then multiply by 3
  • If the cell value is greater than or equal to 80 but less than 100, then multiply by 4.
  • If the cell value is greater than or equal to 100, then display “Enter a value less than 100” Use nested IF function.

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a blank work sheet in LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the following details in respective cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 63
Step 3 – Enter any value in cell A2; then the result will be in cell B2.
Output:

Cell valueResult
1818
3774
115Enter value less than 100
85340

Question 29.
Salary detail of 8 employees are given below.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 64
Develop a formula to compute tax under the following conditions.
1. Tax rate-20%

2. For males, Rs. 2,00,000 is allowed as standard deduction. For females, if taxable income is less than or equal to Rs. 5,00,000, then Rs. 3,00,000 is allowed as standard deduction, otherwise Rs. 2, 50,000. Use suitable logical function.
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the following details in respective cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 65
Step 3 – Enter the formula in cell E2 and copy it to the last employee.
=IF (C2 = “MALE”, (D2-20Q000)*20%, IF (AND(C2 = “FEMALE”, D2<=500000), (D2 – 300000) * 20%, (D2-250000)*20%))
Output:

NameTax
Elsy40,000
Jose90,000
Rosily20,000
Rejina40,000
Antony1,00,000
Jessy30,000
George80,0000
Baby60,000

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 30.
The recruitment process of language teachers in a school consists of three items like interview, group discussion and paper presentation. A candidate has to qualify any one of the three tests to qualify for the written test. The prescribed standard for the items are given below.

  • Interview – 16 score out of 20.
  • Group Discussion – 25 score out of 30.
  • Paper Presentation – 40 score out of 50

Other informations are also available.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 66
Write a formula using OR function to check whether a candidate qualify or not.
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a blank work sheet in LiberOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the available data in work sheet
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 67
Step 3 – Enter the formula in F2 and copy it to the last candidate
= IF(OR (C2>=16, D2>=25, E2>=40) “Qualified for the written Test”, “Not Qualified”)
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 68

Question 31.
Business studies, Accountancy and Economics are commerce subjects. Write a formula to check whether text is a commerce subject. If yes, print **** is a commerce subject, otherwise print **** is not a commerce subject. Write procedure based on the available hints
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a blank work sheet in LiberOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the text in the following cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 69
Step 3 – Enter the name of subject in A2 and type the formula in B2 and drag it
= IF (OR (A2= “Business studies”, A2 = “Accountancy”, A2= “Economics”), A2 & “is a” & “Commerce Subject”, A2 & “is” & “not a commerce subject”)
Output:

SubjectRemarks
MalayalamMalayalam is not a commerce subject
Business studiesBusiness studies is a commerce subject
ChemistryChemistry is not a commerce subject
MathematicsMathematics is not a commerce subject
AccountancyAccountancy is a commerce subject.

Question 32.
ABC company issued a security with par value Rs. 50000 on 1/1/2013. The first interest date is 1-4-2013, the settlement date is 31-12-2015 an the annual coupon rate is 6%. The security’s payments are made quarterly, and a US (NASD) 30/360 day count basis is used. Use ACCRINT() function to calculated the accrued interest of a security that pays periodic interest.
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a blank new worksheet in LibreOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the data in the following cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 70
Step 3 – Enter the formula in B9 = ACCRINT (B2, B3, B4, B5, B6, B7, B8)
Output:

Accrued Interest9000

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 33.
Prince took a loan of Rs. 500000 from banks @ 12% interest p.a. repayable after 15 years. Compute interest payable at the end of (a) First year (b) Second year (c) Fifth year and the last year.
procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the given details in respective cells
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 71
Step 3 – Enter the given formula in respective cells.

  • B8 = CUMIPMT(B3/12, B2*12, B4, B5, B6, B7)
  • C8 = CUMIPMT(C3/12, C2*12, C4, C5, C6, C7)
  • D8 = CUMIPMT(D3/12, D2*12, D4, D5, D6, D7)
  • E8 = CUMIPMT(E3/12, E2*12, E4, E5, E6, E7)

Output:

YearInterest
First year59316.92
Second year57707.11
Fifth year51545.84
Last year4470.16

Question 34.
Calculate the present value of an annuity that pays Rs. 3000 per month for a period of 5 years. The interest is 11.5% per annum and each payment is made at the end of the month.
Assume the payments are made.

  • At the beginning of each month
  • At the end of each month

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the following data/ Formula in respective cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 72
Step 3 – Enter the formula as follows
B6 = PV (B2/12, B3*12, B4, B5)
C6 = PV(C2/12, C3*12, C4, C5)
Output:

Present value – at the beginning136409.4
Present value – at the end136410.04

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 35.
The table given below shows the First name, Middle name and Last name of some employees. Show their Full name in the next column using CONCATENATE Function.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 73
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in Liber Office Calc
Application → Office → Libre Office Calc

Step 2 – Enter the following details in appropriate cells
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 75
Step 3 – Enter the following formula in D2 cell = CONCATENATE (A2, “ ”, B2, “ ”, C2)

Step 4 – Copy down the formula up to the row of last employee.
Output:

FULL NAME
Roby Antony Alappatt
Hema Gangadharan Menon
Cili Jose Vazhappilly
Santhosh Jacob Kannanaikal

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Students can Download Chapter 4 Determinants Questions and Answers, Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Plus Two Maths Determinants Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Using properties of determinants prove \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{x} & {y} & {x+y} \\{y} & {x+y} & {x} \\{x+y} & {x} & {y}\end{array}\right|\) = -2(x3 + y3).
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 1
= 2(x + y)(-x2 + xy – y2) = -2(x3 + y3).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 2.
If a, b, c are real numbers and \(\left|\begin{array}{lll}{b+c} & {c+a} & {a+b} \\{c+a} & {a+b} & {b+c} \\{a+b} & {b+c} & {c+a}\end{array}\right|\) = 0, Show that a = b = c.
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 2
2(a + b + c) [(b – c) (c – b) – (b – a) (c – a)] =0 (a+b+c) = 0
(a + b + c) = 0 or (b – c) (c – b) = (b – a) (c – a)
(a + b + c) = 0 or a = b = c.

Question 3.
Solve using properties of determinants.
\(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{2 x-1} & {x+7} & {x+4} \\{x} & {6} & {2} \\{x-1} & {x+1} & {3}
\end{array}\right|\) = 0
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 3
⇒ (x – 1) (x2 + x – 6x + 6) = 0
⇒ (x – 1)(x2 – 5x + 6) = 0
⇒ (x – 1) (x – 3) (x – 2) = 0
⇒ x = 1, x = 3, x = 2.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 4.
If \(\left|\begin{array}{cc}{3} & {x} \\{x} & {x}\end{array}\right|=\left|\begin{array}{cc}{-2} & {2} \\{4} & {1}\end{array}\right|\), find the value of x.
Answer:
\(\left|\begin{array}{cc}{3} & {x} \\{x} & {x}\end{array}\right|=\left|\begin{array}{cc}{-2} & {2} \\{4} & {1}\end{array}\right|\)
⇒ 3x – x2 = – 2 – 8
⇒ x2 – 3x – 10 = 0
⇒ x = 5, -2.

Question 5.
A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {-3} & {1} \\{2} & {0} & {4} \\{1} & {2} & {-2}
\end{array}\right]\)

  1. Calculate |A| (1)
  2. Find |adjA| {Hint: using the property A × adjA = |A|I} (1)
  3. Find |3A| (1)

Answer:
1. |A| = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {-3} & {1} \\{2} & {0} & {4} \\{1} & {2} & {-2}
\end{array}\right]\) = – 28.

2. A × adjA = |A|I
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 4

3. |3A| = 27 × |A| = 27 × -28 = -756.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 6.
Using properties of determinants prove the following.
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 5
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 6
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 7

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 8
= 2{-{-c){b{a – c)) – b(-c(c + a))}
= 2{c(ab – cb) + b(c2 + ac)}
= 2{abc – c2b + bc2 + abc)} = 4abc.

Plus Two Maths Determinants Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
(i) If \(\left|\begin{array}{rrr}{1} & {-3} & {2} \\{4} & {-1} & {2} \\{3} & {5} & {2}\end{array}\right|\) = 40, then \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {4} & {3} \\{-3} & {-1} & {5} \\{2} & {2} & {2}\end{array}\right|\) = ?
(a)   0
(b)  – 40
(c)  40
(d)  2 (1)
(ii) \(\left|\begin{array}{rrr}{3} & {-3} & {2} \\{12} & {-1} & {2} \\{9} & {5} & {2}\end{array}\right|\) = ?
(a) 120
(b)  40
(c)  – 40
(d)  0 (1)
(iii) Show that ∆ = \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{-a^{2}} & {a b} & {a c} \\{b a} & {-b^{2}} & {b c} \\{a c} & {b c} & {-c^{2}}\end{array}\right|\) = 4a2b2c2 (2)
Answer:
(i) (c) 40

(ii) (a)120

(iii) ∆ = abc\(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{-a} & {a} & {a} \\{b} & {-b} & {b} \\{c} & {c} & {-c}\end{array}\right|\) take a, b, c from C1, C2, C3
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 9

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 2.
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 10
Answer:
(i) \(\left|\begin{array}{ll}{2} & {4} \\{5} & {1}\end{array}\right|=\left|\begin{array}{ll}{2 x} & {4} \\{6} & {x}\end{array}\right|\) ⇒ -18 = 2x2 – 24.
⇒ 2x2 = 6 ⇒ x2 = 3 ⇒ x = \(\pm \sqrt{3}\).

Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 11
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 12

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants
Question 3.
Prove that \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{(b+c)^{2}} & {a^{2}} & {a^{2}} \\{b^{2}} & {(c+a)^{2}} & {b^{2}} \\{c^{2}} & {c^{2}} & {(a+b)^{2}}\end{array}\right|\) = 2abc(a + b + c)3.
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 13
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 14
= (a + b + c)2 × 2ab [(b + c) (c + a) – ab]
= (a + b + c)2 × 2ab [bc + ab + c2 + ac – ab)
= (a + b + c)2 × 2abc [a + b + c]
= 2abc (a + b + c)3.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 4.
(i) Let the value of a determinant is ∆. Then the value of a determinant obtained by interchanging two rows is
(a) ∆
(b) -∆
(c) 0
(d) 1 (1)
(ii) Show that \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{a+b} & {b+c} & {c+a} \\{b+c} & {c+a} & {a+b} \\{c+a} & {a+b} & {b+c}\end{array}\right|=2\left|\begin{array}{lll}{a} & {b} & {c} \\{b} & {c} & {a} \\{c} & {a} & {b}\end{array}\right|\) (3)
Answer:
(i) (b) -∆

(ii) Operating C1 → C1 + C2 + C3, we have
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 15
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 16

Question 5.
Test the consistency 3x – y – 2z = 2, 2y – z = -1, 3x – 5y = 3.
Answer:
The given system of equations can be put in the matrix form, AX = B, where
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 17
|A| = 3(0 – 5) + 1(0 + 3) – 2(0 – 6) = 0
C11 = -5, C12 = -3, C21 = -6, C22 = 10, C23 = 6, C31 = 12, C32 = 5, C33 = 6
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 18
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 19
Therefore the system is inconsistent and has no solutions.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 6.
Consider the system of equations 2x – 3y = 7 and 3x + 4y = 5

  1. Express the system in AX = B form. (1)
  2. Find adj A (2)
  3. Solve the system of equations. (1)

Answer:
1. |A| = \(\left|\begin{array}{cc}{2} & {-3} \\{3} & {4}\end{array}\right|\) = 8 + 9 = 17.

2. c11 = 4, c12 = -3, c21 = 3, c22 = 2,
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 20

3. The given equations can be expressed in the form AX = B,
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 21

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 7.
(i) If A and B are matrices of order 3 such that|A| = -1; |B| = 3, then |3AB| is
(a) -9
(b) -27
(c) -81
(d) 9 (1)
(ii) If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{1} & {\tan x} \\{-\tan x} & {1}\end{array}\right]\), Show that AT A-1 = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{\cos 2 x} & {-\sin 2 x} \\{\sin 2 x} & {\cos 2 x}\end{array}\right]\) (3)
Answer:
(i) (c) -81 (since |3AB| = 27|A||B|).

(ii) |A| = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{1} & {\tan x} \\{-\tan x} & {1}\end{array}\right]\) = sec2x ≠ 0, therefore A is invertible.
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 22

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 8.
Consider the determinant ∆ = \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{x} & {x^{2}} & {1+x^{3}} \\{y} & {y^{2}} & {1+y^{3}} \\{z} & {z^{2}} & {1+z^{3}}\end{array}\right|\), Where x, y, z, are different.
(i) Express the above determinant as sum of two determinants. (1)
(ii) Show that if ∆ = 0, then 1 + xyz = 0. (3)
Answer:
(i) Given,
∆ = \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{x} & {x^{2}} & {1+x^{3}} \\{y} & {y^{2}} & {1+y^{3}} \\{z} & {z^{2}} & {1+z^{3}}\end{array}\right|=\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{x} & {x^{2}} & {1} \\{y} & {y^{2}} & {1} \\{z} & {z^{2}} & {1}\end{array}\right|+\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{x} & {x^{2}} & {x^{3}} \\{y} & {y^{2}} & {y^{3}} \\{z} & {z^{2}} & {z^{3}}\end{array}\right|\)

Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 23
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 24
Given, ∆ = 0 ⇒ (1 + xyz)(y – x)(z – x)(z – y) = 0 ⇒ 1 + xyz = 0
∵ x ≠ y ≠ z.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 9.
(i) The value of the determinant \(\left|\begin{array}{cc}{\sin 10} & {-\cos 10} \\{\sin 80} & {\cos 80}\end{array}\right|\) is
(a) – 1
(b) 1
(c) 0
(d) – 2 (1)
(ii) Using properties of determinants, show that (3)
\(\left|\begin{array}{lll}{a} & {a^{2}} & {b+c} \\{b} & {b^{2}} & {c+a} \\{c} & {c^{2}} & {a+b}\end{array}\right| = (b – c) (c – a) (a – b) (a + b + c)\)
Answer:
(i) (b) Since,
sin 10 cos 80 + cos 10 sin 80 = sin (10 + 80) =sin 90 = 1.

(ii) Let C3 → C3 + C1
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 25
= (a + b + c)(b – a)(c – a)(c + a – b – a)
= (a + b + c)(b – a)(c – a)(c – b)
= (b – c)(c – a)(a – b)(a + b + c).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 10.
(i) Choose the correct answer from the bracket. Consider a square matrix of order 3. Let C11, C12, C13 are cofactors of the elements a11, a12, a13 respectively, then a11C11 + a12C12 + a13C13 is (1)
(a) 0
(b) |A|
(c) 1
(d) none of these.
(ii) Verify A(adjA) = (adjA)A = |A|I for the matrix A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{5} & {-2} \\{3} & {-2}\end{array}\right]\) that, where I = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{1} & {0} \\{0} & {1}\end{array}\right]\) (3)
Answer:
(i) (b) |A|

(ii) |A| = \(\left|\begin{array}{cc}{5} & {-2} \\{3} & {-2}\end{array}\right|\) = – 4
C11 = – 2, C12 = – 3, C21 = 2, C22 = 5
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 26
Hence A(adjA) = (adjA)A = |A|I.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 11.
Consider the following system of equations x + 2y = 4,2x + 5y = 9

  1. If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{1} & {2} \\{2} & {5}\end{array}\right]\), find |A| (1)
  2. Express the above system of equations in the form AX = B (1)
  3. Find adj A, A-1 (1)
  4. Solve the system of equations. (1)

Answer:
1. |A| = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{1} & {2} \\{2} & {5}\end{array}\right]\) = 5 – 4 = 1

2. The given system of equation can be expressed in the form AX = B.
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 27

3. Cofactor matrix of A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{5} & {-2} \\{-2} & {1}\end{array}\right]\)
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 28

4. We have,
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 29
x = 2, y = 1.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 12.
Consider the point X(-2, -3), B(3, 2), C(-1, -8)

  1. Find the area of ∆ABC (2)
  2. Find third vertex of any other triangle with same area and base AB. (2)

Answer:
1. \(\frac{1}{2}\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{-2} & {-3} & {1} \\{3} & {2} & {1} \\{-1} & {-8} & {1}\end{array}\right|\)
\(\frac{1}{2}\) (- 2(2 + 8) + 3(3 + 1) + 1(- 24 + 2)) = – 15
Area of ∆ ABC = 15.

2. The base AB is fixed and the third point is variable. Therefore we can choose any x coordinate and find y coordinate or vice versa.
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 30
⇒ – 2(2 – y) + 3(3 – 1) + 1(3y – 2) = 30
⇒ – 4 + 2y + 6 + 3y – 2 = 30
⇒ 5y = 30 ⇒ y – 6
Therefore point is(1, 6).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 13.
Find the inverse of the following
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 31
Answer:
(i) Let |A| = \(\left|\begin{array}{lll}{1} & {2} & {3} \\{0} & {2} & {4} \\{0} & {0} & {5}\end{array}\right|\) = 10
C11 = 10, C12 = 0, C13 = 0, C21 = – 10, C22 = 5, C23 = 0, C31 = – 2, C32 = – 4, C33 = 2
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 32

(ii) Let |A| = \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {0} & {0} \\{3} & {3} & {0} \\{5} & {2} & {-1}\end{array}\right|\) = -3
C11 = -3, C12 = 3, C13 = -9, C21 = 0, C22 = -1, C23 = -2, C31 = 0, C32 = 0, C33 = 3
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 33

(iii) Let |A| = \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{2} & {1} & {3} \\{4} & {-1} & {0} \\{-7} & {2} & {1}\end{array}\right|\)
= 2(-1 – 0) -1(4 – 0) + 3(8 – 7) = -3
C11 = -1, C12 = -4, C13 = 1, C21 = 5, C22 = 23, C23 = -11, C31 = 3, C32 = 12, C33 = -6

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 34

(iv) Let |A| = \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {-1} & {2} \\{0} & {2} & {-3} \\{3} & {-2} & {4}\end{array}\right|\)
= 1(8 – 6) + 1(0 + 9) + 2(0 – 6) = -1
C11 = 2, C12 = -9, C13 = -6, C21 = 0, C22 = -2, C23 = -1, C31 = 3, C32 = 3, C33 = 2
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 35

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 14.
Consider the system of equations 5x + 2y = 4, 7x + 3y = 5. If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{5} & {2} \\{7} & {3}\end{array}\right]\), X = \(\left[\begin{array}{l}{\mathrm{r}} \\{y}\end{array}\right]\) and B = \(\left[\begin{array}{l}{4} \\{5}\end{array}\right]\)

  1. Find |A| (1)
  2. Find A-1 (2)
  3. Solve the above system of equations. (1)

Answer:
1. |A| = \(\left|\begin{array}{ll}{5} & {2} \\{7} & {3}\end{array}\right|\) = 15 – 14 = 1.

2. Given, A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{5} & {2} \\{7} & {3}\end{array}\right]\)
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 36

3. X = A-1B
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 37
⇒ x = 2, y = -3.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Plus Two Maths Determinants Six Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
(i) Let A be a square matrix of order ‘n’ then |KA| = …….. (1)
(ii) Find x if \(\left|\begin{array}{cc}{x} & {2} \\{18} & {x}\end{array}\right|=\left|\begin{array}{cc}{6} & {2} \\{18} & {6}\end{array}\right|\) (2)
(iii) Choose the correct answer from the bracket. The value of the determinant \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{0} & {p-q} & {p-r} \\{q-p} & {0} & {q-r} \\{r-p} & {r-q} & {0}
\end{array}\right|\) is ….. (1)
(iv) Consider \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{a} & {a+b} & {a+b+c} \\{2 a} & {3 a+2 b} & {4 a+3 b+2 c} \\{3 a} & {6 a+3 b} & {10 a+6 b+3 c}\end{array}\right|\) (2)
Answer:
(i) If A be a square matrix of order n, then |KA| = Kn|A|

(ii) \(\left|\begin{array}{cc}{x} & {2} \\{18} & {x}\end{array}\right|=\left|\begin{array}{cc}{6} & {2} \\{18} & {6}\end{array}\right|\) ⇒ x2 – 36 = 0
⇒ x2 = 36 ⇒ x = ±6.

(iii) (c) 0 (since the given determinant is the determinant of a third order skew symmetric matrix)

Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 38
= a [7a2 + 3ab – 6a2 – 3ab] = a(a2) = a3

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 2.
(i) Let \(\left|\begin{array}{lll}{1} & {3} & {2} \\{2} & {0} & {1} \\{3} & {4} & {3}
\end{array}\right|\) = 3, then what is the value of \(\left|\begin{array}{lll}{1} & {3} & {2} \\{4} & {0} & {2} \\{3} & {4} & {3}\end{array}\right|\) = ? and\(\left|\begin{array}{lll}{6} & {7} & {6} \\{2} & {0} & {1} \\{3} & {4} & {3}\end{array}\right| \) = ? (2)
(Hint: Use the properties of determinants)
(ii) Using properties of determinants show that (4)
\(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{1+a} & {1} & {1} \\{1} & {1+b} & {1} \\{1} & {1} & {1+c}\end{array}\right|=a b c\left(1+\frac{1}{a}+\frac{1}{b}+\frac{1}{c}\right)\)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 39

(ii) Taking ‘a’ from R1, ‘b‘ from R2,’C’ from R3
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 40
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 41

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants
Question 3.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{2} & {-3} & {5} \\{3} & {2} & {-4} \\{1} & {1} & {-2}\end{array}\right]\)

  1. Find |A| (1)
  2. Find adj.A. (2)
  3. Solve 2x – 3y + 5z = 11, 3x + 2y – 4z = -5, x + y – 2z = -3 (3)

Answer:
1. A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{2} & {-3} & {5} \\{3} & {2} & {-4} \\{1} & {1} & {-2}\end{array}\right]\)
|A| = 2 × 0 + 3x – 2 + 5 = -1.

2. Co.factor A
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 42

3. Given
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 43
i.e; AX = B ⇒ X = A-1 B
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 44

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 4.
Let A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {-1} & {1} \\{2} & {1} & {-3} \\{1} & {1} & {1}\end{array}\right]\)

  1. Is A singular? (1)
  2. Find adj A. (2)
  3. Obtain A-1 (1)
  4. Using A-1 solve the system of equations x – y + z = 4, 2x + y – 3z = 0, x + y + z = 2 (2)

Answer:
1. A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {-1} & {1} \\{2} & {1} & {-3} \\{1} & {1} & {1}\end{array}\right]\)
⇒ |A| = 4 + 5 + 1 = 10 ≠ 0
A is non singular matrix.

2. Cofactor A
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 45

3. A-1 = \(\frac{1}{10}\) \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{4} & {2} & {2} \\{-5} & {0} & {5} \\{1} & {-2} {3}\end{array}\right]\)

4. Given, AX = B ⇒ X = A-1 B
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 46
⇒ x = 2, y = -1, z = 1.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 5.
Solve the following system of linear equations.

  1. x + y + z = 3, y – z = 0, 2x – y = 1 (6)
  2. 5x – 6y + 4z = 15 , 7x + 4y – 3z = 19, 2x + y + 6z = 46 (6)
  3. x + 2y + 5z = 10, x – y – z = -2, 2x + 3_y-2 = -11 (6)

Answer:
1. Let AX = B
Where A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {1} & {1} \\{0} & {1} & {-1} \\{2} & {-1} & {0}\end{array}\right], X=\left[\begin{array}{c}{x} \\{y} \\{z}\end{array}\right], B=\left[\begin{array}{l}{3} \\{0} \\{1}\end{array}\right]\)
|A| = 1(0 – 1) – 1(0 + 2) + 1(0 – 2) = -5
C11 = -1, C12 = -2, C13 = -2, C21 = -1, C22 = 3, C23 = 3, C31 = -2, C32 = 1, C33 = 1
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 47

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

2. Let AX = B,
Where A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{5} & {-6} & {4} \\{7} & {4} & {-3} \\{2} & {1} & {6}\end{array}\right], X=\left[\begin{array}{c}{x} \\{y} \\{z}\end{array}\right],B=\left[\begin{array}{c}{15} \\{19} \\{46}\end{array}\right]\)
|A| = 5(24 + 3) + 6(42 + 6) + 4(7 – 8) = 419
C11 = 27, C12 = -48, C13 = -1, C21 = -1, C22 = 22, C23 = -17, C31 = 2, C32 = 43, C33 = 62
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 48
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 49

3. Let AX = B
\(\text { Where } A=\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {2} & {5} \\{1} & {-1} & {-1} \\{2} & {3} & {-1}
\end{array}\right], X=\left[\begin{array}{c}{x} \\{y} \\{z}\end{array}\right], B=\left[\begin{array}{c}{10} \\{-2} \\{-11}\end{array}\right]\)
|A| = 1(4) – 2(1) + 5(5) = 27
C11 = 4, C12 = -1, C13 = 5, C21 = 17, C22 = -11, C23 = 1, C31 = 3, C32 = 6, C33 = -3
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 50
⇒ x = -1, y = -2, z = 3.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 6.
If f(x) = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{\cos x} & {-\sin x} & {0} \\{\sin x} & {\cos x} & {0} \\{0} & {0} & {1}\end{array}\right]\)
(i) Find f(-x) (2)
(ii) Find (f(x)]-1 (2)
(iii) Is |f(x)]-1 = f(-x)? (2)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 51

(ii) |f(x)| = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{\cos x} & {-\sin x} & {0} \\{\sin x} & {\cos x} & {0} \\{0} & {0} & {1}\end{array}\right]\) = cos x (cos x) + sin x (sin x) = 1 ≠ 0
Therefore , [f(x)]-1 exists.
The cofactors are as follows.
C11 = cos x, C12 = -sin x, C13 = 0, C21 = sin x, C22 = cos x, C23 = 0, C31 = 0, C32 = 0, C33 = 1
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 52
Since, |f(x)|= 1

(iii) Yes. From (1) and (2) we have,
[f(x)]-1 =f(-x).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 7.
(i) Choose the correct answer from the bracket. If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{2} & {3} \\{1} & {-2}\end{array}\right]\) and A-1 = kA, then the value of ‘k’ is
(a) 7
(b) -7
(c) \(\frac{1}{7}\)
(d)\(-\frac{1}{7}\) (1)
(ii) If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {-1} & {1} \\{2} & {-1} & {0} \\{1} & {0} & {0}
\end{array}\right]\),
(a) A2 (2)
(b) Show that A2 = A-1 (3)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 53
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 54
C11 = 0, C12 = 0, C13 = 1, C21 = 0, C22 = -1, C23 = -1, C31 = 1, C32 = 2, C33 = 1
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 55

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 8.
‘Arjun’ purchased 3 pens, 2 purses, and 1 instrument box and pays Rs. 410. From the same Shop ‘Deeraj’ purchases 2 pens, 1 purse, and 2 instrument boxes and pays Rs.290, while ‘Sindhu’ purchases 2pens, 2 purses, 2 instrument boxes and pays Rs. 440.

  1. Translate the equation into system of linear equations. (2)
  2. The cost of one pen, one purse and one instrument box using matrix method. (4)

Answer:
1. Let The price of one pen is Rs.x, one purse is Rs.y and one instrument box be Rs.z
3x + 2y + z = 410; 2x + y + 2z =290; 2x + 2y + 2z = 440(1) 2 mts.

2. The system can be represented by the matrix equation AX = B
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 56
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 57
C11 = -2, C12 = 0, C13 = 2, C21 = -2, C22 = 4, C23 = -2, C31 = 3, C32 = -4, C33 = -1
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 58
Hence the cost one pen is Rs.20, one purse is Rs. 150 and one instrument box is Rs. 50.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 9.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{2} & {-3} & {5} \\{3} & {2} & {-4} \\{1} & {1} & {-2}\end{array}\right]\)

  1. Find A-1 (3)
  2. Using it solve the system of equations 2x – 3y + 5z = 16, 3x + 2y – 4z = -4, x + y – 2z = -3 (3)

Answer:
1. A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{2} & {-3} & {5} \\{3} & {2} & {-4} \\{1} & {1} & {-2}\end{array}\right]\)
⇒ |A| = 0 + 3x – 2 + 5 = -1
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 59

2. Given AX = B
⇒ X = A-1B
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 60
⇒ x = 2, y = 1, z = 3.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 10.
Consider the following system of equations x + y + 3z = 5, x + 3y – 3z = 1, -2x – 4y – 4z = -10
(i) Convert the given system in the form AX = B (1)
(ii) Find A-1 (3)
(iii) Hence solve the system of equations. (2)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 61

(ii) i.e; AX = B, ⇒ X = A-1 B ⇒ |A| = -24 + 10 + 6 = -8
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 62

(iii) X = A-1B
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 63
= \(-\frac{1}{8}\) \(\left[\begin{array}{l}{-8} \\{-8} \\{-8}\end{array}\right]\)
⇒ x = 1, y = 1, z = 1.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 11.
Solve the following system by equations by matrix method x + 2y + 5z = 10; x – y – z = -2; 2x + 3y – z = -11.
Answer:
x + 2y + 5z = 10; x – y – z = -2; 2x + 3y – z = 11
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 64
⇒ x = -1, y = -2, z = 3.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 12.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{3} & {-2} & {3} \\{2} & {1} & {-1} \\{4} & {-3} & {2}\end{array}\right]\)

  1. Find |A| (1)
  2. Find A-1 (3)
  3. Solve the linear equations 3x – 2y + 3z = 8; 2x + y – z = 1; 4x – 3y + 2z = 4 (2)

Answer:
1. |A| = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{3} & {-2} & {3} \\{2} & {1} & {-1} \\{4} & {-3} & {2}\end{array}\right]\)
= 3(2 – 3) + 2(4 + 4) + 3(- 6 – 4) = -17.

2. |A| ≠ 0, hence its inverse exists.
A-1 = \(\frac{1}{|A|}\)adj A
C11 = -1, C12 = -8, C13 = -10, C21 = -5, C22 = -6, C23 = 1, C31 = -1, C32 = 9, C33 = 7
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 65

3. The given system of linear equations is of the form
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 66
∴ We have, x = 1, y = 2, z = 3.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 13.
if \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{2} & {5} \\{-3} & {7}\end{array}\right] \times A=\left[\begin{array}{cc}{17} & {-1} \\{47} & {-13}\end{array}\right]\) then
(i) Find the 2 × 2 matrix A. (3)
(ii) Find A2. (1)
(iii) Show that A2 + 5A – 6I = 0, where I is the identity matrix of order 2. (2)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 67
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 68
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 69
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 70

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Students can Download Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Plus Two Computer Science Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Among the following which one is the most correct. JavaScript is used mostly at the
(a) client side
(b) server side
(c) client side and server side
Answer:
(a) client side

Question 2.
Name the tag that is used to embed scripts in a web page.
Answer:
<SCRIPT>

Question 3.
In JavaScript, a variable is declared using the keyword
Answer:
var

Question 4.
………………. are small programs embedded in the HTML pages.
Answer:
Scripts

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Question 5.
Who developed JavaScript?
Answer:
Brendan Eich

Question 6.
………… are the scripts that are executed by the browser
Answer:
Client Scripts

Question 7.
……………… are the scripts that are executed by the web server.
Answer:
Server Scripts.

Question 8.
……………… Script is a platform independent script.
Answer:
JavaScript

Question 9.
……………. Script is a platform dependent script.
Answer:
VBScript

Question 10.
……………. makes the tags meaningful.
Answer:
Attribute

Question 11.
……………. attribute specifies the name of the scripting language used.
Answer:
Language

Question 12.
State True or False
The identifiers are case sensitive
Answer:
True

Question 13.
Which part of the browser executes the JavaScript.
Answer:
JavaScript engine

Question 14.
Odd one out
(a) Google Chrome
(b) Internet Explorer
(c) Mozilla Firefox
(d) C++
Answer:
(d) C++, It is a programming language others are browsers.

Question 15.
A group of codes with a name is called …………
Answer:
function

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Question 16.
To declare a function the keyword ……………. is used.
Answer:
function

Question 17.
A function contains a function …………. and function ………
Answer:
header, body

Question 18.
State true or false
Even though a function is defined within the body section, it will not be executed, if it is not called.
Answer:
True

Question 19.
Write down the purpose of the following code snippet
function print()
{
document.writefWelcome to JS”);
}
Answer:
This code snippet is used to display the string, “Welcome to JS” on the screen (monitor)

Question 20.
From the following select which one is Not the data type in JavaScript
(a) Number
(b) String
(c) Boolean
(d) Time
Answer:
(d) Time

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Question 21.
…………… keyword is used to declare a variable in JavaScript.
Answer:
var

Question 22.
…………. function is used to return the data type.
Answer:
typeof()

Question 23.
……………….. is a special data type to represent variables that are not defined using var.
Answer:
undefined

Question 24.
Odd one out
(a) +
(b) –
(c) %
(d) ==
Answer:
(d) == , It is a relational operator the others are arithmetic operator

Question 25.
Odd one out
(a) &&
(b) ||
(c) !
(d) %
Answer:
(d) %, it is an arithmetic operator, others are logical operator.

Question 26.
Odd one out
(a) <
(b) >
(c) ==
(d) !
Answer:
(d) ! it is a logical operator, the others are relational operator.

Question 27.
Consider the following declaration
varb;
From the following which value can be used for the variable b as boolean value.
(a) True
(b) TRUE
(c) True
(d) FALSE
Answer:
(a) True, The value is case sensitive

Question 28.
Predict the output of the following.
var a, b;
a = ”0480″;
b = 2828159;
document.write(a+b);
Answer:
The output is “04802828159”. That is the string “0480″ concatenates(joins) the number 2828159. The output is a string, not a number.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Question 29.
Predict the output
var x, y;
x = ”8″;
y = 3;
document. write(x+y);
Answer:
The output is a string “83”; String addition means concatenation.

Question 30.
From the following which method is used to display a message (dialog box) on the screen.
(a) alert()
(b) isNaN()
(c) toUpperCase()
(d) toLowerCase()
Answer:
(a) alert()

Question 31.
Raju wants to convert a lower case text to Upper case text, which function is to be used.
Answer:
toUpperCase()

Question 32.
Christy wants to convert an upper case text to lower case text, which function is to be used.
Answer:
tolower case()

Question 33.
Andrea wants to check a value is a number or not. From the following which function is used for that.
(a) isNumb()
(b) isNaN()
(c) isNotNumb()
(d) isNotNumber()
Answer:
(b) isNaN()

Question 34.
Predict the output of the following code snippet
var x =”HIGHER SECONDARY”;
alert(x.charAt(4));
Answer:
It displays a message box with character ‘E’ from the fifth (4 + 1) place

Question 35.
Read the following three statements regarding JavaScript.
(a) JavaScript can be used at the client side for data validation.
(b) JavaScript statements are case sensitive.
(c) JavaScript can be used only for creating web pages.
(d) All the three statements are correct
Answer:
(d) All the three statements are correct

Question 36.
Write the output of the following web page.
<HTML>
<BODY>
<SCRIPT languge = “JavaScript”> document.write(“welcome”);
</SCRIPT>
welcome
</BODY>
</HTML>
Answer:
welcome welcome

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Question 37.
Following is the web page that accepts a string from a text box, converts in to upper case and display it on the screen. Complete the missing portion in the page.
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<SCRIPT language = JavaScript”> function show()
{
var x, y;
x = ………….. ;
y = x.toupperCase ();
alert (y);
<SCRIPT>
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<FORM name= “form1 ”>
Enter a string
<tNPUTtype=“text”name=“TEXTr>
<INPUT type= “submit” onClick() = “show()”> </FORM>
</BODY>
</HTML>
Answer:
document.form1.text1.value

Question 38.
Name the attribute of <SCRIPT> tag that is used to include an external JavaScript file into a web page.
Answer:
src

Plus Two Computer Science Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A javaScript code has the following three variables and values.
x = “Script”;
y = “3”;
z = “2″;
Then match the following table.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript img1
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript img2

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Question 2.
“Placing JavaScript as an external file has some advantages”. Do you agree with this statement? Why?
Answer:
External (another) JavaScript file:
We can write scripts in a file and save it as a separate file with the extension .js. The advantage is that this file can be used across multiple HTML files and can be enhance the speed of page loading.

Question 3.
Explain the difference between the statements.
document.write (“welcome”);
and
alert (“welcome)”;
Answer:
document.write () is a JavaScript command used to print anything on the browser window, document writes (“welcome”) prints “welcome” on the browser window. alert (“welcome”). This is a built in function used to display a message here the message “welcome” in a separate window.

Question 4.
Is it necessary to use Language – ‘JavaScript” in the <SCRIPT> tag to specify the JavaScript code? Why?
Answer:
No, it is not necessary. If the language attribute is not specified, it will take the default value as Javascript.

Question 5.
Write the output of the following web page:
<HTML>
<BODY>
<SCRIPT language=”JavaScript”> function show ()
{
document.write(“welcome to JavaScript”);
}
</SCRIPT>
</BODY>
</HTML>
Answer:
It will not display anything on the screen. This code snippet contains a function that will not do anything unless it is invoked(called).

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Question 6.
Write the output of the following web page:
<HTML>
<BODY>
<SCRIPT language -”JavaScript”>
function show ()
{
document.write (“welcome to JavaScript<br>”);
}
</SCRIPT>
show();
show();
<BODY>
</HTML>
Answer:
The output is as follows
welcome to JavaScript
welcome to JavaScript
The message repeats 2 times.

Question 7.
Among the following, identify the data types used in JavaScript
int, float, number, char, boolean, long
Answer:
From the list there is only two, number and boolean are the types used in JavaScript.

Question 8.
Write the output of the following web page and justify your answer.
<HTML>
<BODY>
<SCRIPT language =’’JavaScript”>
var x, y, z;
x =“10”;
y = “20”;
z = x+y;
document.write(z);
</SCRIPT>
</BODY>
</HTML>
Answer:
x = “10” means x is a string variable y = “20” means y is a string variable x + y means the string x and y will be concatenated Hence it displays 1020

Question 9.
What do you mean by Scripts? Explain?
Answer:
Scripts are small programs embedded in the HTML pages. <SCRIPT> tag is used to write scripts,
The attributes used are:

  • Type – To specify the scripting language
  • Src – Specify the source file

Two types of scripts:
1. Client scripts – These are scripts executed by the browser.
Eg: VB Script, Javascript, etc.

2. Server scripts – These are scripts executed by the server.
Eg: ASP, JSP, PHP, Perl, etc.

The languages that are used to write scripts are known as scripting languages.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Question 10.
Suppose you have written a JavaScript function named checkData(). You want to execute the function when the mouse pointer is just moved over the button. How will you complete the following to do the same?
<INPUT Type=”button” ______ = “checkData()”>
Answer:
<INPUT Type=”button” onMouseEnter = “checkData()”>

Plus Two Computer Science Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Categorize the following as UpperCamelCase or lowerCamelCase and explain.
(a) DateOfBirth
(b) dateOfJoining
(c) timeOfJoining
(d) PlaceOfBirth
Answer:
CamelCase:
An identifier does not use special characters such as space hence a single word is formed using multiple words. Such a naming method is called CamelCase (without space between words and all the words first character is in upper case letter).

These are two types:
1. UpperCamelCase: when the first character of each word is capitalised,
2. lowerCamelCase: when the first character of each word except the first word is capitalised.

  • UpperCamelCase: DateOfBirth, PlaceOfBirth
  • lowerCamelCase: dateOfJoining, time Of Joining.

Question 2.
Explain the method of working of a JavaScript
Answer:
Every browser has a JavaScript engine. If the code snippet contains JavaScript code, it is passed to the JavaScript engine for processing, the engine executes the code. If there is no script then it processes without the help of script engine. Hence an HTML file without JavaScript is faster than with JavaScript code.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Question 3.
Write down the various data types used in JavaScript.
Answer:

  1. Number: Any number(whole or fractional) with or without a sign.
    Eg: +1977,-38.0003,-100,3.14157,etc
  2. String: It is a combination of characters enclosed within double-quotes.
    Eg: “BVM”, “[email protected]”, etc
  3. Boolean: We can use either true or false.lt is case sensitive. That means can’t use TRUE OR FALSE

Question 4.
Explain how a variable is declaring in JavaScript
Answer:
For storing values you have to declare a variable, for that the keyword var is used. There is no need to specify the data type.
Syntax:
var<variable name1> [, <variable name2>, <variable name3>,etc…]
Here square bracket indicates optional.
Eg: var x, y, z;
x =11;
y = “BVM”;
z = false;
Here x is of number type, y is of string and z is of Boolean type.

Question 5.
What are the different ways to add Scripts to a web page?
Answer:
The three different ways to add Scripts as follows
1. Inside <BODY> section
Scripts can be placed inside the <BODY> section.

2. Inside <HEAD> section
Scripts can be placed inside the <HEAD> section. This method is widely accepted method

3. External (another) JavaScript file
We can write scripts in a file and save it as a separate file with the extension .js. The advantage is that this file can be used across multiple HTML files and can be enhance the speed of page loading.

Question 6.
Create a web page that checks whether a student has passed or not?
Answer:
<HTML>
<head>
<title>
JavaScript-Passed or not </title>
<SCRIPTLanguage=”JavaScript”> function check()
{
var score;
score=document.frmCheck.txtscore.value; . if(score<30)
alert(“The student is failed”); else ;
alert(“The student is passed”);
}
</SCRIPT>
</head>
<BODY>
<Form name=”frmCheck”>
Enter the score
<inputtype=”text” name=”txtscore”>
<br>
<input type=”button” value=”check” onClick= “check()”>
</Form>
</BODY>
</HTML>

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Question 7.
Create a web page to display the squares of first 10 numbers
Answer:
<HTML>
<head>
<title>
JavaScript- squares
</title>
</head>
<BODY>
<SCRIPT Language=”JavaScript”> vari.s;
for(i=1; i<=10; i++)
{
s= i * i;
document.write(s);
document.write(“<br>”);
}
</SCRIPT>
</BODY>
</HTML>

Question 8.
Create a web page to display even numbers up to 10.
Answer:
<HTML>
<head>
<title>
JavaScript- squares </title>
</head>
<BODY>
<SCRI PT Language=”JavaScript”>
vari;
i=2;
while(i<=10)
{
document.write(i); document.write(“<br>”); i +=2;
}
</SCRIPT>
</BODY>
</HTML>

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Question 9.
Following web page is used to show “Passed” or “Failed” based on a mark. Mark’less than 30 is cosidered as failed. There are some errors in the code. Correct them.
<HTML>
<BODY>
<SCRIPT src=”JavaScript”>
var m;
m = 55;
if(m<30)
document.print(“Passed”);
document.print(“Failed”);
<SCRIPT>
</BODY>
</HTML>
Answer:
<HTML>
<BODY>
<SCRIPT language=”JavaScript”>
var m;
m = 55;
if(m<30)
document.write(“Passed”);
else
document.write(“Failed”);
</BODY>
</HTML>
</SCRIPT>

Plus Two Computer Science Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Consider the following declarations
vara, b, c, d;
a = “BVM”;
b = 100;
c = true;
d = 3.14157;
Predict the output of the following

  1. document.write(typeof(a)); (1)
  2. document.write(typeof(b)); (1)
  3. document.write(typeof(c)); (1)
  4. document.write(typeof(d)); (1)
  5. document.write(typeof(e)); (1)

Answer:

  1. string
  2. number
  3. boolean
  4. number
  5. undefined

Question 2.
Create a web page to print the day of a week
Answer:
<HTML>
<head>
<title>
JavaScript- day </title>
<SCRIPT Language=”JavaSCTipt”>
function checkData()
{
var n, ans;
n=Number(document.frmCheck.txtday. value); switch (n)
{
case 1;
ans=”Sunday”; break; case 2:
ans=”Monday”; break; case 3:
ans=”Tuesday”; break; case 4:
ans=”Wednesday”;
break;
case 5:
ans=”Thursday”;
break;
case 6:
ans=”Friday”;
break;
case 7:
ans=”Saturday”;
break;
default:
ans=”lnvalid”
}
alert(ans);
}
</SCRIPT>
</head>
<BODY>
<Form name=”frmCheck”>
Enteranumber(1-7)
<inputtype=”text” name=”txtday”>
<br>
<input type=”button” va|ue=”Test” onClick= “checkData()”>
</Form>
</BODY>
</HTML>

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Question 3.
What is the operator? Explain in detail.
Answer:
Operators are the symbols used to perform an operation
1. Arithmetic operators:
It is a binary operator. It is used to perform addition(+), subtraction(-), division (/), multiplication (*), modulus(%-gives the remainder), increment(++) and decrement(- -) operations.
Eg. If x = 10andy = 3then
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript img3
lf x = 10 then
document.write(++x); → It prints 10 + 1 = 11 If x = 10 then
document.write(x++); → It prints 10 itself. If x = 10 then
document.write(—x); It prints 10 – 1 = 9 If x = 10 then
document.write(x—); → It prints 10 itself.

2. Assignment operators:
If a = 10 and b = 3 then a = b. This statement sets the value of a and b are same,i.e. it sets a to 3.
It is also called short hands lf X = 10 and Y = 3 then
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript img4

3. Relational(Comparision) operators:
It is used to perform comparison or relational operation between two values and returns either true or false.
Eg: if X =10 and Y = 3 then
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript img5

4. Logical operators:
Here AND(&&), OR(||) are binary operators and NOT (!) is a unary operator. It is used to combine relational operations and it gives either true or false If X = true and Y = false then
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript img6

Both operands must be true to get a true value in the case of AND(&&) operation. If X = true and Y = false then
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript img7

Either one of the operands must be true to get true value in the case of OR(||) operation If X = true and Y = false then
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript img8

5. String addition operator(+):
This is also called concatenation operator. joins(concatenates)two strings and forms a string.
Eg:
var x, y, z;
x = “BVM HSS;
y = “Kalparamba”;
z = x + y;
Here the variable z becomes “BVM HSS Kalparamba”.
Note: If both the operands are numbers then addition operator(+) produces number as a result otherwise it produces string as a result. Consider the following
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript img9

Question 4.
Write down the control structures used in JavaScript.
Answer:
Control structures in JavaScript, In general, the execution of the program is sequential, we can change the normal execution by using the control structures.
1. simple if Syntax:
if(test expression)
{
statements;
}
First, the test expression is evaluated, if it is true then the statement block will be executed otherwise not.
if-else Syntax:
if(test expression)
{
statement block1;
}
else
{
statement block2;
}
First, the test expression is evaluated, if it is true then the statement block1 will be executed otherwise statement block2 will be evaluated.
2. switch:
It is a multiple branch statement. Its syntax is given below, switch (expression)
{
case value1: statements;break;
case value2: statements;break;
case value3: statements;break;
case value4: statements;break;
case value5: statements;break;
default: statements;
}
First expression evaluated and selects the statements with matched case value.
Eg.
switch (n)
{
case 1: cout << “Sunday”;break;
case 2: cout << “Monday”;break;
case 3: cout << “Tuesday”;break;
case 4: cout << “Wednesday”;break;
case 5: cout << “Thursday”;break;
case 6: cout << “Friday”;break;
case 7: cout << “Saturday”;break;
default: cout << “lnvalid”
}
3. for loop
If a statement wants to execute more than once. Loop is used. for loop is an entry controlled loop.
The syntax of for loop is given below For(initialisation; testing; updation)
{
Body of the for loop;
}
while loop
If a statement wants to execute more than once Loop is used. It is also an entry controlled loop The syntax is given below
Loop variable initialised while(expression)
{
Body of the loop;
Update loop variable;
}
Here the loop variable must be initialised outside the while loop. Then the expression is evaluated if it is true then only the body of the loop will be executed and the loop variable must be updated inside the body. The body of the loop will be executed until the expression becomes false.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Question 5.
Write down the different mouse events used in JavaScript.
Answer:
Different mouse events and their description is given below

EventDescription
onClickIt occurs when the user clicks on an object by using mouse
on mouse enterIt occurs when the mouse pointer is moved onto an object
on mouse leaveIt occurs when the mouse pointer is moved out of an object
onKeyDownIt occurs when the user presses a key on the keyboard
on KeyUpIt occurs when the user releases a key on the keyboard

Question 6.
Create a web page that displays the capital of a state.
Answer:
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<TITLE>
JavaScript </TITLE>
<SCRIPT Language=”JavaScript”> function capital()
{
varn.ans;
n=document.frmCapital.cbostate.selectedlndex; switch(n)
{
case 0:
ans=’Thiruvananthapuram”; i break;
case 1:
ans=”Bengaluru”;
break;
case 2:
ans=”Chennai”;
break;
case 3:
ans=”Mumbai”;
break;
}
document.frmCapital.txtCapital.value=ans;
}
</SCRIPT>
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<FORM name=”frmCapital”>
<center>
State
<select size=1 name=”cbostate”>
<option>Kerala</option>
<option>Kamataka</option>
<option>Tamilnadu</option>
<option>Maharashtra</option>
</select>
<br>
Capital
<input type=”text” name=”txtCapital>
<br>
<input type=”button” value=”Show” onClick= “capital()”>
</center>
</FORM>
</BODY>
</HTML>

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System

Students can Download Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System Questions and Answers, Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System

Plus Two Accountancy Overview of Computerised Accounting System One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Accounting Packages are developed on the basis of
(a) Accounting concepts
(b) Accounting conventions
(c) Both Accounting concepts and Conventions
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Both Accounting concepts and Conventions

Question 2.
What type of Software is an Accounting Package?
(a) System Software
(b) Application Software
(c) Utility Software
(d) Basic
Answer:
(b) Application Software

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System

Question 3.
The components of computerised accounting system are
(a) Data, Report, Ledger, software, Hardware
(b) Software, Hardware, People, Procedure, Data
(c) Data, Coding, Procedure, Objective, Output
(d) People, Procedure, Hard ware, software
Answer:
(b) Software, Hardware, People, Procedure, Data

Question 4.
Grouping of Accounts means the classification of data from:
(a) Assets, Capital, and Liabilities
(b) Assets, Capital, Liabilities, Revenues & Expenses
(c) Assets, Owners equity, Revenue & Expenses
(d) Capital, Liabilities, Revenues, & Expenses
Answer:
(b) Assets, Capital, Liabilities, Revenues & Expenses

Question 5.
Codification of Accounts required for the purpose of:
(a) Hierarchical relationship between groups and components
(b) Data processing faster and preparing of final accounts
(c) Keeping data and information secured
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Hierarchical relationship between groups and components

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System

Question 6.
Method of codification should be
(a) Such that it leads to grouping of accounts
(b) An identification mark
(c) Easy to understand and leads to grouping of accounts
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Easy to understand and leads to grouping of accounts

Question 7.
Final account subsystem in Accounting Information System (AIS) deals with
(a) Preparation of budgets
(b) Preparation of Pay Roll
(c) Preparation of Final Accounts
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Preparation of Final Accounts

Question 8.
Pick the odd one out
(a) Password security
(b) Data Audit
(c) Data Bank
(d) Data vault
Answer:
(c) Data Bank

Question 9.
Which among the following is an example of mnemonic codes.
(a) AS03, AS04, AS05
(b) 1925, 1926, 1927, 1928
(c) ACC, ECO, ENG, MAL
(d) 001-100, 101-200, 201-300, 301-400
Answer:
(c) ACC, ECO, ENG, MAL

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System

Question 10.
Which among the following deals with generation of reports that are vital for management decision making?
(a) Costing sub system
(b) Pay Roll Accounting Sub system
(c) Budget Sub System
(d) Management Information System
Answer:
(d) Management Information System

Question 11.
The need of codification is
(a) Easy to process data
(b) Keeping proper records
(c) The generation of block codes
(d) The encryption of data
Answer:
(d) The encryption of data

Question 12.
Choose the correct pair
(a) Cash and Bank sub system – Deals with receipts and payments of cash
(b) Inventory subsystem – deals with recording of sales
(c) Payroll Accounting sub system – deals with the preparation of final accounts
(d) Accounts receivable sub system – deals with expenses.
Answer:
(a) Cash and Bank sub system – Deals with receipts and payments of cash

Plus Two Accountancy Overview of Computerised Accounting System Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Name the Five pillers of computerised Accounting System.
Answer:
Procedure, Data, people, Hardware and software

Question 2.
What is computerised accounting?
Answer:
Computerised accounting is the process of recording business transactions and generating financial statements and reports with the help of computer.

Question 3.
List down any Five popular accounting softwares available in India.
Answer:
GNUKhata, Tally, Dac Easy, Tata Ex, Peach Tree

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System

Question 4.
Define Data
Answer:
Data is raw, unorganised facts that need to be processed. Data can be something simple and useless until it is organised.
When data is processed, organised, structured or presented in a given context so as to make it useful, it is called information. A computer is an information processing machine. Computers process data to produce information

Question 5.
Write down any two features of computerised accounting system
Answer:
Features of computerised accounting system:
1. Simple and Integrated:
Computerised accounting system is designed to integrate all the business operations such as sales, finance, purchase, etc.

2. Accuracy and speed:
Computrised Accounting system provides data entry forms for fast and accurate data entry of the transactions.

3. Scalability:
The system can cope easily with the increase in the volume of business transactions. The software can be used for any size and type of the organisation.

Question 6.
What are the account groups of Trading Account under Computerised Accounting System?
Answer:

  • Sales account
  • Purchase account
  • Direct Expenses Account
  • Direct Incomes Account

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System

Question 7.
Complete the Table
Name of Account –  Account group in financial Account
Sundry Debtors –  Balance sheet, Asset side

  1. Indirect Income __________________________
  2. Current Liabilities ________________________
  3. Stock in hand ____________________________
  4. Sales Account ___________________________

Answer:

  1. Profit & Loss Account, Credit side
  2. Balances Sheet, Liability side
  3. Balance Sheet, Asset side
  4. Trading Account, Credit side

Question 8.
What do you mean by sequential code? Give example.
Answer:
Sequential codes:
Here numbers or alphabets are assigned in consecutive order. These codes are applied primarily to source documents such as cheques, invoices, etc.
Example:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System Three marks q4 img 1

Question 9.
What are the basic accounting reports prepared by Computerised Accounting System?
Answer:

  • Day Book/ Journals
  • Ledges
  • Trial balance
  • Profit and Loss Account
  • Balance Sheet

Plus Two Accountancy Overview of Computerised Accounting System Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A computerised accounting software is developed for a company. In Ledger Group, Expenses are divided in to direct expenses and indirect expenses. All the possible expenses of the company are listed under these two sub headings. Appropriate identification numbers are assigned to each such items.

  1. Identify the concepts referred to this context
  2. Give explanations to each.

Answer:

  1. Grouping of Accounts and codification of Accounts
  2. Grouping of accounts means classifying the ledger accounts and organizing them under major heads of accounts
    The process of assigning codes to account groups and ledger groups is called codification of accounts.

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System

Question 2.
What are the advantages of computerised Accounting System?
Answer:

  • Financial reports can be prepared in time
  • Alterations and additions in transactions are easy and gives the changed result in all books of accounts instantly
  • It ensures effective control over the system
  • Economy in the processing of accounting data
  • Confidentiality of data is maintained
  • The closing balance of one financial year is automatically carried forward to next financial year

Question 3.
Create an accounting hierarchy for the following ledger account:

  • Cash-in-hand
  • Provisions for Tax
  • Land and Buildings
  • Bank Account (Current)
  • Trade Investments
  • Investments in Govt. Securities
  • Deposits with Bank
  • Duties and Taxes
  • Sundry Debtors

Answer:

  • Fixed assets: Land & Building Investment in Govt. Securities
  • Current assets: Cash in hand Trade Investments
  • Bank: Bank a/c (Current), Deposits with bank
  • Sundry debtors: Sundry debtors
  • Loans & advances: Provision for Tax
  • Duties and Taxes: Duties of Taxes

Question 4.
What are the different types of codes commonly used in CAS?
Answer:
Sequential codes:
Here numbers or alphabets are assigned in consecutive order. These codes are applied primarily to source documents such as cheques, invoices, etc.
Example:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System Three marks q4 img 1

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System

2. Block Codes:
In Block codes, a range of numbers is alloted to a particular account group. Here, numbers within a range follow sequential coding scheme.
Room Numbering System of a Lodge

 CodeAccount group (group of Legers)
100 – 199Rooms in First Floor
200 – 299Rooms in Second Floor
300 – 399Rooms in third Floor

Coding of Dresses

CodeAccount group (group of Legers)
HS400 – HS 499Half Sleeve Shirts
FS500 – FS 599Full Sleeve Shirts
MI 600 – MI 699Mens Inner Wares

3. Mnemonic codes:
A mnemonic code consists of alphabets or abbreviations as symbols to codify an account.
1.

CodeName of Accounts
1) SLRSalary Account
2) BODBank Overdraft
3) INVInventory

2.

CodeName of Places
1) TSRThrissur
2) TVMThiruvananthapuram
3) DLHDelhi

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System

Question 5.
Distinguish between Data Audit and Data Vault
Answer:
Security Features of Computerised Accounting Software
1. Data Audit:
It enables one to know as to who and what changes have been made in the original data there by helping and fixing the responsibility of the person who has manipulated the data and ensures data integrity.

2. Data Vault:
Software provides additional security through data encryption. Encryption means scrambling the data so as to make its interpretation impossible.

Question 6.
What is the activity sequence of computerised Accounting information processing model?
Answer:

  • Collect data
  • Organise data
  • Communicate Accounting Information

Question 7.
Akhil, your class mate, argues that computerised Accounting System suffers some draw

  1. Do you agree with this?
  2. Give your justification

Answer:

  1. I agree
  2. Limitations of CAS.
    • Faster Obsolescence of technology necessitates frequently upgradation in accounting software.
    • Data may be lost or corrupted due to power interruption.
    • Un programmed reports can not be generated
    • Alterations in transactions are easy. This reduces the reliability of accounting work.
    • Work with CAS is expensive.

 

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System

Question 8.
What are the different components of computerised Accounting System?
Answer:
Components of computerised Accounting System:

  • Procedure: A logical sequence of actions to perform a task.
  • Data: The raw fact for any business operation.
  • People: Users of computerised accounting system
  • Hardware: The physical components of a computer.
  • Software: A set of programmes to do a work.

Plus Two Accountancy Overview of Computerised Accounting System Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
In the computerised accounting package used by a trading concern, the fixed assets and current assets are combined to form the assets group. The fixed assets are sub divided into tangible and intangible assets.
Show the hierarchy of this ledger group, assuming various assets items.
Answer:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System Four marks q1 img 2

Question 2.
Illustrate with example methodology to develop coding structure.
Answer:
Methodology to Develop Coding Structure:
Let us examine the 15 digit Goods and Services Tax Identification Number (GSTIN). GSTIN is a 15 digit unique code that is assigned to each taxpayer, which will be state-wise and PAN-based.

GSTIN Format or Structure (GSTIN):
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System Four marks q2 img 4
From the above details, we can identify that GSTIN is a combination of state code, PAN, number of registration within the state, default digit and check code to detect errors.

Another Example:
Let us examine how to develop a coding structure for students in Thrissur district under DHSE. The first step is to develop a hierarchy of the school system and attributes
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System Four marks q2 img 5
Thus we allocate 13 digit code to a student.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System Four marks q2 img 6

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System

Question 3.
What do you mean by AIS? What are the different subsystems of AIS?
Answer:
Accounting Information System (AIS):
Accounting Information System (AIS) and its various subsystems may be implemented through the Computerised Accounting System (CAS). Such system of AIS are described below.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System Four marks q3 img 7
1. Cash and Bank subsystem:
Receipts and payments of cash

2. Sales and Accounts Receivable sub system:
Maintaining of sales and Receivables ledgers.

3. Inventory sub system:
Purchase and sale of goods, Specifying the price, quantity, and date.

4. Purchase and Accounts Payable Sub system:
Maintaining of purchase and payable leadgers.

5. Pav Roll Accounting sub System:
Payment of salaries and wages.

6. Fixed Assets Accounting Sub system:
Purcahses, additions, sale and usage of fixed assets.

7. Expense Accounting sub system:
Various types of expenses.

8. Tax Accounting Sub system:
Deals with GSTIN, Income Tax etc.

9. Final Accounts sub system:
Preparation of final accounts.

10. Costing sub system:
Ascertainment of cost of goods produced.

11. Budget sub system:
Preparation of budgets.

12. Management information sub system (MIS):
Preparation of reports that are vital for management decision making.

Question 4.
What is DATA Encryption? What are the security features of CAS?
Answer:
Security Features of Computerised Accounting Software:
Every accounting software ensures data security, safety, and confidentiality by providing the features like Password Security, Data Audit and Data Vault.

1. Password Security:
Password is the key to allow the access to the system. Computerised accounting system protects the unauthorised persons from accessing to the business data. Only authorised person, who is supplied with the password, can enter to the system.

2. Data Audit:
It enables one to know as to who and what changes have been made in the original data there by helping and fixing the responsibility of the person who has manipulated the data and ensures data integrity.

3. Data Vault:
Software provides additional security through data encryption. Encryption means scrambling the data so as to make its interpretation impossible.

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System

Question 5.
Draw a chart showing different sub systems of Accounting information system.
Answer:
Accounting Information System (AIS):
Accounting Information System (AIS) and its various sub-systems may be implemented through Compterised Accounting System (CAS). Such system of AIS are described below.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System Four marks q3 img 7
1. Cash and Bank subsystem:
Receipts and payments of cash

2. Sales and Accounts Receivable sub system:
Maintaining of sales and Receivables ledgers.

3. Inventory sub system:
Purchase and sale of goods, Specifying the price, quantity, and date.

4. Purchase and Accounts Payable Sub system:
Maintaing of purchase and payable leadgers.

5. Pav Roll Accounting sub System:
Payment of salaries and wages.

6. Fixed Assets Accounting Sub system:
Purcahses, additions, sale and usage of fixed assets.

7. Expense Accounting sub system:
Various types of expenses.

8. Tax Accounting Sub system:
Deals with GSTIN, Income Tax, etc.

9. Final Accounts sub system:
Preparation of final accounts.

10. Costing sub system:
Ascertainment of cost of goods produced.

11. Budget sub system:
Preparation of budgets.

12. Management information sub system (MIS):
Preparation of reports that are vital for management decision making.

Question 6.
Differentiate between Data and Information.
Answer:

DataInformation
1. It is used as input1. It is the output of processed data
2. Data is the raw material2. Information is the product
3. It doesn’t carry a meaning3. It must carry a logical meaning
4. It is an independent value4. Information depends on data

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Students can Download Chapter 1 The Solid State Questions and Answers, Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Plus Two Chemistry The Solid State One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The 14 possible three dimensional crystal lattices are called ____________.
Answer:
Bravais Lattices

Question 2.
Which of the following type of cubic lattices has maximum number of atoms per unit cell?
(a) simple cubic
(b) body centred cubic
(c) face centred cubic
(d) all have same
Answer:
(c) face centred cubic (4 atoms per unit cell)

Question 3.
F- centres in an ionic crystal are
(a) lattice sites containing electrones
(b) interstitial sites containing electrons
(c) lattice cites that are vacant
(d) interstitial sites containing electrones
Answer:
(a) lattice sites containing electrons

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Question 4.
The colour imparted by excess potassium in KCl crystal is ________.
Answer:
Violet (or lilac)

Question 5.
Which of the following substances show anti-ferromagnetism?
(a) ZrO2
(b) CdO
(c) CrO2
(d) Mn2O3
Answer:
(d) Mn2O3

Question 6.
The number of tetrahedral and octahedral voids in a ccp array of 100 atoms are respectively.
Answer:
200 and 100

Question 7.
Potassium dichromate belongs to which crystal system.
Answer:
Triclinic

Question 8.
A solid compound contains XYZ atoms in a cubic lattice with X atoms occupying the corners, Y atoms in the body centred positions and Z atoms at the centres of faces of the unit cell. What is the empirical formula of the compound Answer:
XYZ3

Question 9.
The empty space in body centred cubic lattice is
Answer:
32%

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Question 10.
Which solid has the weakest intermolecular force
Answer:
ice

Question 11.
In crystalline solid, atoms, ions or molecules are held in an orderly array. But some point defect is observed in a crystal, when a vacancy is created by an atom or ion dislocated from its normal position to an interstitial site. What is the defect called?
Answer:
Frenkel defect

Plus Two Chemistry The Solid State Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State two marks q1 Img 1

  1. Write the names of A and B?
  2. Identify and write the name of the shaded parts of A and B?

Answer:
1. Names of A and B are:

  • Hexagonal close packing.
  • Square close packing,

2. shaded parts of A and B are:

  • Is octahedral void; in
  • Is tetrahedral void.

Question 2.
Teacher said that Frenkel defect will not happen in alkali metal halides. Ramu asked the reason for this. Can you explain?
Answer:
Frenkel defect is favoured by the small size of cations. In alkali metal halides both cations and anions are of almost same size.

Question 3.
“Dielectric substances are related to conductors.”
“Dielectric substances do not conduct electricity at normal condition”
These are two arguments of a class discussion.

  1. Do you agree with these arguments?
  2. If yes, justify both statements?

Answer:

  1. Yes.
  2. Dielectric substances do not conduct electricity through them. But they can be made conductors either by heating the substances or by applying mechanical stress.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Question 4.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State two marks q3 Img 2

  1. Identify A and B.
  2. Explain them.

Answer:
1. A and B.

  • A – Square close packed (scp) arrangement in two dimensions.
  • B- Hexagonal close packed (hep) arrangement in two dimensions.

2. Explanation:

(a) A – Square close packed:
(scp) arrangement in two dimensions – particles of the second row are arranged just below the first row. Similarly, particles of third row are arranged just below the particles of the second row and so on. Here vertical as well as horizontal alignment is possible. In this arrangement each particle is in direct contact with four other particles and the coordination number is 4.

(b) B- Hexagonal close packed:
(hep) arrangement in two dimensions – In this arrangement, particles of second row are arranged in the depressions of the particles of the first row. Similarly the particles of the third row are arranged in the depressions of the particles of the second row. In this arrangement, each particle is in direct contact with six other particles and the coordination number is 6.

Question 5.

  1. Name the unit of magnetic moment.
  2. Match the following.
    • Paramagnetic – Fe3O4
    • Ferromagnetic – O2
    • Antiferromagnetic – CrO2
    • Ferrimagnetic – MnO

Answer:

  1. Bohr magneton (μB)
  2. Match
    • Paramagnetic – O2
    • Ferromagnetic – CrO2
    • Antiferromagnetic – MnO
    • Ferrimagnetic – Fe3O4

Question 6.
All crystals exhibit imperfections.

  1. Which law is related to this statement?
  2. Draw the picture showing Frenkel defect.

Answer:
1. Third law of thermodynamics.

2.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State two marks q6 Img 3

Question 7.
What do you mean by Anisotropy how is it differ from isotropy
Answer:

AnisotropicIsotropic
Physical properties have different values along different directionsPhysical property would be same in any direction
Because they have different arrangement in different directionsBecause arrangement is irregular in any direction

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Question 8.
A cubic solid is made of two elements P and Q. Atoms of Q are at the corners of the cube and P at the body-centre. What is the formula of the compound? What are the coordination numbers of P and Q?
Answer:
The atom at the corner makes \(\frac{1}{8}\) contribution while atom at body centre makes 1 contribution to the unit cell.
No. of atoms of Q per unit cell = 8 × \(\frac{1}{8}\) = 1
No. of atoms of P per unit cell = 1 × 1 = 1 Therefore, formula of the compound is PQ.
The atom at the body centre would be in contact with all the atoms at the corners. Hence, the coordination number of P is 8.
Similarly, coordination number of Q is 8 because it is shared by 8 other atoms.

Question 9.
Packing efficiency differ for B.C.C, F.C.C and Simple cube what is packing efficiency?
Answer:
Packing efficiency is the % of total space filled by the particle.

OR

Packing efficiency = \(\frac{\text { Volume occupied by spheres in the unit cell }}{\text { Total volume of the unit cell }} \times 100[/latex ]

Question 10.
If NaCl is doped with 10-3 mol % of SrCl2, what is the concentration of cation vacancies?
Answer:
Every Sr2+ ion causes one cation vacancy (because two Na+ ions are replaced by one Sr2+ and it occupies the site of one Na+ ion and the other site remains vacant.) Therefore, introduction of 10-3 moles of SrCl2 per 100 moles of NaCl would introduce 10-3 moles cation vacancies in 100 moles of NaCl.
No. of vacancies per mole of NaCl = [latex]\frac{10^{-3}}{100}\) × 6.02 × 1023 = 6.02 × 1018

Question 11.
Even crystal, the substance which we consider as the most perfect solid, shows some defects or imperfections.

  1. Which law in thermodynamics deals with this topic?
  2. Explain the law.

Answer:

  1. Third law of thermodynamics
  2. Entropy of a perfectly crystalline substance is zero at absolute zero temperature.

Question 12.
Excess of Li makes LiCl crystal pink and excess of K makes KCl crystals lilac. Is this true? How will you account for the above processes?
Answer:
Yes. This is an example for metal excess defect due to anion vacancies. The colour is due to the presence of F – centre in the crystals.

Question 13.
What are the consequences of Schottky and Frenkel defects?
Answer:
Frenkel defect does not change the density of the crystal but Schottky defect decreases the density of the substance.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Question 14.
Calculate the number of atoms per unit cell of silver which crystallizes in fee lattice.
Answer:

  • Contribution of particles from one corner = 1/8
  • Contribution from 8 corners = 1/8 × 8 = 1
  • Contribution from 6 face centres = 1/2 × 6 = 3
  • Total number of particles present in the unit cell of the crystal = 1 + 3 = 4
  • Number of atoms present in one unit cell of Ag = 4.

Question 15.
Explain the type of voids found in three-dimensional close packing in crystals.
Answer:
Two voids
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State two marks q15 Img 4

Plus Two Chemistry The Solid State Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
In an answer paper a student wrote as “carborundum crystals are very soft.”

  1. Do you agree with this?
  2. What is your opinion?
  3. In which crystal type carborundum is included?
  4. Substantiate your view.

Answer:

  1. No.
  2. Carborundum crystals are very hard.
  3. Covalent crystal.
  4. In the case of covalent crystals the constituent particles are atoms and they are held together by strong covalent bond network. In carborundum covalent bond network is constituted by Si and C atom which are held very strongly at their positions. Hence, carborundum is a covalent crystal and is very hard.

Question 2.
During a seminar a student asked another student, “Can NaCl give flame test?”

  1. Write your answer.
  2. Write the colour of sodium during flame test.
  3. Write the name of the point which is responsible for the colour of alkali metal halides having excess metal ions.

Answer:

  1. Yes
  2. Golden yellow
  3. F-centre electron trapped anion vaccancy

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Question 3.
Solids are classified into two types.

  1. What are they?
  2. Give two examples.
  3. Give 3 features of them.

Answer:
1. Crystalline and amorphous.

2. Crystalline – NaCl, KCl. Amorphous-Plastic, rubber.

3.

Crystalline SolidsAmorphous Solids
1. Sharp melting point1. Melting point is in a range of temperature
2. Long range order2. Short range order
3. Anisotropic3. Isotropic
4. Definite shape4. Irregular shape

Question 4.
Teacher explained that due to a stoichiometric defect, the density of a crystal changes.

  1. Name the defect.
  2. What change can we observe?
  3. Give an example.

Answer:

  1. Schottky defect
  2. Density decrease
  3. NaCl

Question 5.
1. Packing efficiency is the percentage of total space filled by the particles. Which of the following lattices has the highest packing efficiency? Simple cubic lattice, body centered cubic lattice, hexagonal close packed lattice.

2. An element has a body centred cubic structure with a cell edge of 288 pm. The density of the element is 7.2 g/cm3. How many atoms are present in 208 g of the element?
Answer:
1. Hexagonal close packed lattice.

2. a = 288 pm = 288 × 10-10 cm
Volume of the unit cell = (288 × 10-10cm)3
= 23.9 × 10-24cm3
Volume of 208 g of the element
\(\frac{208 \mathrm{g}}{7.2 \mathrm{g} \mathrm{cm}^{-3}}\) = 28.88 cm3
∴ Number of units cells in 208 g =
\(\frac{28.88 \mathrm{cm}^{3}}{23.9 \times 10^{-24} \mathrm{cm}^{3}}\) = 1.208 × 1024
For bcc structure, number of atoms in one unit cell = 2
∴ Number of atoms in 208 g = 2 × 1.208 × 1024
= 2.416 × 1024

Question 6.
Derive packing efficiency of

  1. ccp and hep structure
  2. Body centered cubic
  3. Simple cubic

Answer:
1. Packing Efficiency in ccp and hep Structures:
In the case of ccp and hep, the edge length
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State three marks q6 Img 5
We know that each unit cell in ccp structure has 4 spheres.
Volume of sphere = \(\frac{4 \pi r^{3}}{3}\)
Volume of the cube = a3
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State three marks q6 Img 6

2. Packing Efficiency of Body Centred Cubic Structures:
In this case radius of a sphere.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State three marks q6 Img 7
We know that bcc has 2 spheres in the unit cell.
∴ Packing efficiency = \(\frac{2 \times \frac{4}{3} \pi r^{3}}{\left[\left(\frac{4}{\sqrt{3}} r\right)\right]^{3}}\) × 100% = 68%

3. Packing Efficiency is Simple Cubic Lattice:
In simple cubic lattice edge length ‘a’ and radius of the sphere ‘r’ are related as,
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State three marks q6 Img
We know that a simple cubic unit cell contains only one sphere.
∴ Packing efficiency = \(\frac{1 \times \frac{4}{3} \pi r^{3}}{(2 r)^{3}}\) × 100%
= 52.36%
= 52.4%

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Question 7.
Iron (II) oxide crystallise in cubic structure with unit cell edge of 5.0 Å If the density of the oxide is 3.8 g cm-3. Calculate the no.of Fe2+ and O2- present in each unit cell, [atomic mass of Fe = 56, O = 16] (3)
Answer:
Cell edge a = 5.0Å = 5.0 × 10-1 m = 5 × 10-8 cm
Density = 3.8 g/cm3 Molecular mass of FeO = 56 + 16 = 72 u
NA = 6.022 × 1023
d = \(\frac{Z M}{N_{A} a^{3}}\)
Z = \(\frac{d N_{A} a^{3}}{M}=\frac{3.8 \times 6.022 \times 10^{23}}{72} \times\left(5 \times 10^{-8}\right)^{3}\)
= 3.97 = 4
Each cell contain 4 FeO molecule every FeO molecule contain one Fe2+ and one O2- ion. So no. of Fe2+ ion =4 no.of O2- ion = 4

Question 8.
Which are the two types of close packing in two dimension. What are its differences?
Answer:
1. Square close packing or AAA type.

  • Coordination no.4. One sphere is in touch with 4 other spheres
  • 2nd raw placed exactly under the first raw

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State three marks q8 Img 8

2. Hexagonal close packing or AB AB Type.

  • Coordination no.6 ie. one spheres is in touch with other six spheres.
  • 2nd raw is placed in the depressions of first raw.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State three marks q8 Img 9

Question 9.
Classify the following solids as ionic, metallic, molecular, network (covalent) or amorphous.

  • Tetraphosphorus decoxide (P4O10)
  • Ammonium phosphate (NH4PO4)
  • SiC
  • I2
  • P4
  • Plastic
  • Graphite
  • Brass
  • Rb
  • LiBr
  • Si

Answer:

  • Tetraphosphorus decoxide (P4O10) – Molecularsolid
  • Ammonium phosphate (NH4PO4) – Ionic solid
  • SiC – Network(covalent) solid
  • I2 – Molecular solid
  • P4 – Molecular solid
  • Plastic-Amorphous solid
  • Graphite – Network(covalent) solid
  • Brass – Metallic solid
  • Rb- Metallic solid
  • LiBr – Ionic solid
  • Si – Network(covalent) solid

Question 10.
A substance A’ crystallizes in fee lattice.

  1. Calculate the number of atoms present per unit cell of ‘A’.
  2. In a crystalline solid AB, some vacancy is produced by missing of equal number of oppositely charged ions. What is the defect called?

Answer:

  1. The number of atoms present per unit cell of ‘A’.
    • Contribution from 8 corners = 1/8 × 8 = 1
    • Contribution from centres of 6 faces = 1/2 × 6 = 3
    • Total number of atoms of A’ per unit cell = 1 +3 = 4
  2. Schottky defect

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Question 11.

  1. What is meant by the term coordination number?
  2. What is the coordination number of atoms:
    • In a cubic close-packed lattice?
    • In a body-centred cubic structure?

Answer:

  1. The number of nearest neighbours in a packing is called coordination number.
  2. The coordination number of atoms
    • In cubic-close packed structure each atom is in direct contact with 12 other atoms. Hence, its coordination number is 12.
    • In a body centred cubic structure coordination number is 8

Question 12.
Identify the crystal.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State three marks q12 Img 10

  1. Write the name of the crystal.
  2. How many particles are present the unit cell of this crystal?
  3. Write the relation connecting edge length and radius of the particle.

Answer:

  1. Face centred cubic crystal.
  2. Particles are present the unit cell of this crystal.
    • Contribution from 8 corners = 1/8 × 8 = 1
    • Contribution from 6 face centers = 1/2 × 6 = 3
    • The total number of particles = 4
  3. r = \(\frac{\sqrt{2} a}{4}=\frac{a}{2 \sqrt{2}}\).

Question 13.
1. The following diagram shows the alignment of magnetic moments for some magnetic properties.

  • ↑↑↑↑↑↑
  • ↑↓↑↓↑↓
  • ↑↑↓↑↑↓

Identify the magnetic properties denoted by (a), (b), (c).

2. Examine the substances H2O, NaCl, C6H6 and name the magnetic property common to them.
Answer:
1. The alignment of magnetic moments for some magnetic properties.

  • Ferromagnetic
  • Antiferromagnetic
  • Ferrimagnetic

2. Diamagnetism

Question 14.
How many lattice points are there in one unit cell of the following lattices?

  1. Face centred cubic
  2. Body centred cubic
  3. Simple cubic

Answer:

  1. Face centred cubic – 4
  2. Body centred cubic – 2
  3. Simple cubic – 1

Plus Two Chemistry The Solid State Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.

  • Classify the following into crystalline and amorphous solids.
    1. NaCl
    2. Graphite
    3. Plastic
    4. Diamond
    5. Rubber
    6. KCl
    7. Wood
    8. CaCO3
    9. Iodine
  • Write any two properties of graphite.

Answer:

Crystalline solidsAmorphous solids
NaCl, GraphitePlastic
Diamond, CsClRubber
CaCO3, IodineWood
  • Two properties of graphite
    1. It is a good conductor of electricity.
    2. Graphite is a good solid lubricant.

Question 2.
Fill in the blanks.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State four marks q2 Img 11
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State four marks q2 Img 12

Question 3.

  1. NaCl shows mainly Schottky defect and AgCl shows Frenkel defect. Do you agree with this statement? Justify.
  2. Classify the following solids into isotropic and anisotropic.
    Polyvinylchloride, Rubber, Glucose, Glass

Answer:

  1. Yes. In NaCl, both Na+ and Cl are of almost same size and hence it shows Schottky defect. But in AgCl, Ag+ is smaller than Cf. Hence, it shows Frenkel defect.
  2. Anisotropic-Glucose
    Isotropic – Glass, Rubber, Polyvinylchloride

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Question 4.
The common salt, sodium chloride is an example for a crystal system with edge length a = b = c and axial angles α = β = γ = 90°.

  1. Identify the crystal system.
  2. What happens when sodium chloride crystal is heated in presence of sodium?

Answer:

  1. Cubic crystal
  2. Gives yellow colour to the crystal due to F centre, ie. electron trapped anion vaccancy. It is a metal excess defect.

Question 5.
Stoichiometric defects are of two types such as vacancy defects and interstitial defects.

  1. Which defect is basically a vacancy defect in ionic solids?
  2. Which stoichiometric defect causes the decrease in density of solid?
  3. On heating white ZnO it turns yellow. Which is the crystal involved here? Explain.

Answer:

  1. Schottky defect
  2. Schottky defect
  3. It is due to metal excess defect caused by the presence of extra cations at interstitial sites. ZnO is white in colour at room temperature. On heating it loses oxygen and turns yellow.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State four marks q5 Img 13
The excess Zn2+ ions move to interstitial sites and the electrons to neighbouring interstitial sites. The yellow colour of non-stoichiometric ZnO (Zn1+xO) is due to these trapped electrons.

Question 6.

  1. Why is Frenkel defect not found in alkali metal halides?
  2. A crystalline solid has simple cubic structure in which P atoms are present at the corners, Q atoms are present at the edge centres and R atoms are present at the centre of the unit cell. What is the formula of the compound?

Answer:
1. Frenkel defect is favoured by the small size of cations. In alkali metal halides both cations and anions are of almost same size.

2. Number of atoms of P = \(\frac{1}{8}\) × 8 = 1
Number of atoms of Q = \(\frac{1}{4}\) × 12 = 3 4
Number of atoms of R = 1
∴ Formula of the compound is PQ3R

Question 7.

  1. Classify each of the following solids as ionic, metallic, molecular, network or amorphous.
    • I2
    • Plastic
    • LiBr
    • SiC
  2. In terms of band theory differentiate Conductors, insulators & semi conductors

Answer:

  1. Classification of solids as ionic, metallic, molecular, network or amorphous.
    • I2 – Molecular
    • Plastic – Amorphous
    • LiBr – Ionic
    • SiC – Covalent
  2. Differences between Conductors, insulators & semi conductors.
    • Conductors:
      The valence band overlaps with the conduction band or no energy gap exists between them.
    • Insulators:
      The energy gap between valance band and conduction band is very large. Hence electrons from valence band cannot move into the conduction band. Semi conductors have small energy gap between valence band and conduction band.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State four marks q7 Img 14

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Question 8.
On the basis of nature of constituent particles crystals are classified into four types.

  1. Which are they?
  2. In which type does diamond belongs to? Why?
  3. Can you say whether Iodine can be written as an example of ionic crystal? Why?

Answer:

  1. Ionic crystals, Molecular crystals, Covalent crystals and Metallic crystals.
  2. Diamond belongs to covalent crystals, because in diamond, the constituent particles are carbon atoms connected by strong covalent bonds.
  3. No. In ionic crystal the constituent particles are ions. Since the constituent particles of iodine are molecules, it is a molecular crystal.

Question 9.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State four marks q9 Img 15

  1. Distinguish between A and B?
  2. Explain the defect in figure B.
  3. Give two examples of crystals showing this defect.

Answer:

  1. Fig. A – Ideal crystal. Fig. B – Frenkel defect.
  2. Frenkel defect is due to the migration of cation from its original position to the void. This type of defect is favoured by the small size of cation. As a result of this defect, the neutrality, density and stoichiometry remain the same. But the conductivity increases.
  3. AgCl, AgBr

Question 10.
The teacher explained crystal defects in classroom.

  1. What are the different types of crystal defects?
  2. Explain with the help of diagram the important difference between Schottky and Frenkel defects?

Answer:
1. Stoichiometric defects and Non-Stoichiometric defects.

2.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State four marks q10 Img 16

Question 11.
NaCl is an example for diamagnetic substance.

  1. Write an example for paramagnetic substance.
  2. What is the difference between ferromagnetic and anti ferromagnetic substances?
  3. In case of ferri magnetic substances net magnetic moment is not zero. Justify.

Answer:
1. CuO
2. & 3.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State four marks q11 Img 17

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Question 12.
The diagram of a cubic crystal whose molecular mass = M, edge length = a, density = ρ,  is given below. N is the Avogadro number.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State four marks q12 Img 18

  1. From the above given details find the mass of this cube and also the mass of N particles?
  2. By equating these two equations, try to find out a suitable equation for the density of this cube.

Answer:
1. Mass of cube = volume × density = a3 ρ ……………. (1)
Mass of N particles = N × Mass of one particle
= N × \(\frac{M}{N_{A}}\) (M = Gram Atomic Mass) …………. (2)

2. The equations (1) & (2) represent the mass of the cube.
i.e., a3p = N × \(\frac{M}{N_{A}}\)
∴ \(\rho=\frac{N \times M}{a^{3} \times N_{A}}\)

Question 13.

  1. Classify each of the following as being either a p- type or a n-type semiconductor.
    • Ge dopped with In
    • Si dopped with B
  2. A compound is formed by two elements P and Q. The element Q forms ccp and atoms of P occupy 1/3rd of the tetrahedral voids. What is the formula of the compound?

Answer:
1. Either a p- type or a n-type semiconductor

  • Ge dopped with In → p-type
  • Si dopped with B → p-type

2. The formula of the compound
Q = 4
No. of tetrahedral voids = 2N = 2 × 4 = 8
P = 1/3 × 8 = 8/3
Q8/3P4 = Q8P12 = Q2P3

Plus Two Chemistry The Solid State NCERT Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Classify the following solids as ionic, metallic, molecular, network (covalent) or amorphous.

  • Tetraphosphorus decoxide (P4O10)
  • Ammonium phosphate (NH4PO4)
  • SiC
  • I2
  • P4
  • Plastic
  • Graphite
  • Brass
  • Rb
  • LiBr
  • Si

Answer:

  • Tetraphosphorus decoxide (P4O10) – Molecularsolid
  • Ammonium phosphate (NH4PO4) – Ionic solid
  • SiC – Network(covalent) solid
  • I2 – Molecular solid
  • P4 – Molecular solid
  • Plastic-Amorphous solid
  • Graphite – Network(covalent) solid
  • Brass – Metallic solid
  • Rb- Metallic solid
  • LiBr – Ionic solid
  • Si – Network(covalent) solid

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Question 2.

  1. What is meant by the term coordination number?
  2. What is the coordination number of atoms:
    • In a cubic close-packed lattice?
    • In a body-centred cubic structure?

Answer:

  1. The number of nearest neighbours in a packing is called coordination number.
  2. The coordination number of atoms
    • In cubic-close packed structure each atom is in direct contact with 12 other atoms. Hence, its coordination number is 12.
    • In a body centred cubic structure coordination number is 8

Question 3.
How many lattice points are there in one unit cell of each of the following lattice?

  1. Face-centred cubic
  2. End-centred monoclinic
  3. Body-centred

Answer:
1. A face-centred cubic unit cell has lattice points at the corners of the cube and at face centres. There are eight comers and six faces of the cube. Each atom at corner makes a contribution of \(\frac{1}{8}\) while each atom at face centre makes a contribution of \(\frac{1}{2}\) to the unit cell.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State ncert q3 Img 19
Therefore, the number of atoms per unit cell
= 8 × \(\frac{1}{8}\) + 6 × \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 1 + 3 = 4

2. A end-centred monoclinic unit cell has lattice points at the face centres of only one set (two) of faces, in addition to the lattice points at the comers of the unit cell.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State ncert q3 Img 20
Therefore, the number of atoms per unit cell =
8 × \(\frac{1}{8}\) + 2 × \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 1 + 1 = 2

3. A body centred cubic unit cell has lattice points at the comers of the cube and at the body centre.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State ncert q3 Img 21
Therefore, the number of atoms per unit cell
= 8 × \(\frac{1}{8}\) + 1 × 1 = 1 + 1 = 2

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Question 4.
A cubic solid is made of two elements P and Q. Atoms of Q are at the corners of the cube and P at the body-centre. What is the formula of the compound? What are the coordination numbers of P and Q?
Answer:
The atom at the corner makes \(\frac{1}{8}\) contribution while atom at body centre makes 1 contribution to the unit cell.
No. of atoms of Q per unit cell = 8 × \(\frac{1}{8}\) = 1
No. of atoms of P per unit cell = 1 × 1 = 1 Therefore, formula of the compound is PQ.
The atom at the body centre would be in contact with all the atoms at the corners. Hence, the coordination number of P is 8.
Similarly, the coordination number of Q is 8 because it is shared by 8 other atoms.

Question 5.
If NaCl is doped with 10-3 mol % of SrCl2, what is the concentration of cation vacancies?
Answer:
Every Sr2+ ion causes one cation vacancy (because two Na+ ions are replaced by one Sr2+ and it occupies the site of one Na+ ion and the other site remains vacant.) Therefore, introduction of 10-3 moles of SrCl2 per 100 moles of NaCl would introduce 10-3 moles cation vacancies in 100 moles of NaCl.
No. of vacancies per mole of NaCl = \(\frac{10^{-3}}{100}\) × 6.02 × 1023 = 6.02 × 1018

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Students can Download Chapter 3 Matrices Questions and Answers, Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Plus Two Maths Matrices Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Find the value of a, b and c from the following equations;
\(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{a-b} & {2 a+c} \\{2 a-b} & {3 c+d}
\end{array}\right]=\left[\begin{array}{cc}{-1} & {5} \\{0} & {13}\end{array}\right]\).
Answer:
Given;
\(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{a-b} & {2 a+c} \\{2 a-b} & {3 c+d}
\end{array}\right]=\left[\begin{array}{cc}{-1} & {5} \\{0} & {13}\end{array}\right]\)
⇒ a – b = -1, 2a + c = 5, 2a – b = 0, 3c + d = 13
⇒ a – b = -1
2a – b = 0
– a = -1
⇒ a = 1
We have, a – b = -1 ⇒ 1 – b = -1 ⇒ b = 2
⇒ 2a + c = 5 ⇒ 2 + c = 5 ⇒ c = 3
⇒ 3c + d = 13 ⇒ 9 + d = 13 ⇒ d = 4.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 2.
Simplify cosx\(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{\cos x} & {\sin x} \\{-\sin x} & {\cos x}\end{array}\right]\) + sinx\(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{\sin x} & {-\cos x} \\{\cos x} & {\sin x}\end{array}\right]\).
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 1

Question 3.
Solve the equation for x, y z and t; if
\(2\left[\begin{array}{ll}{x} & {z} \\{y} & {t}\end{array}\right]+3\left[\begin{array}{cc}{1} & {-1} \\{0} & {2}\end{array}\right]=3\left[\begin{array}{ll}{3} & {5} \\{4} & {6}\end{array}\right]\).
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 2
⇒ 2x + 3 = 9 ⇒ x = 3
⇒ 2z – 3 = 15 ⇒ z = 9
⇒ 2y = 12 ⇒ y = 6
⇒ 2t + 6 = 18 ⇒ t = 6.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 4.
Find A2 – 5A + 6I If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{2} & {0} & {1} \\{2} & {1} & {3} \\{1} & {-1} & {0}\end{array}\right]\)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 3
A2 – 5A + 6I
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 4

Question 5.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{3} & {-2} \\{4} & {-2}\end{array}\right]\) find k so that A2 = kA – 2I.
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 5
Given A2 = kA – 2I
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 6
1 = 3k – 2 ⇒ k = 1.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 6.
Express A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{-1} & {2} & {3} \\{5} & {7} & {9} \\{-2} & {1} & {1}
\end{array}\right]\) as the sum of a symmetric and skew symmetric matrix.
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 7
P = 1/2 (A + AT) is symmetric.
Q = 1/2 (A – AT) is skew symmetric.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 8

Question 7.
Find the inverse of the following using elementary transformations.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 9
Answer:
(i) Let A = I A
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 10

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

(ii) Let A = IA
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 11

(iii) Let A = IA
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 12

(iv) Let A = IA
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 13

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 8.
Find the inverse of the matrix A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{2} & {3} \\{-1} & {5}\end{array}\right]\) using row transformation.
Answer:
A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{2} & {3} \\{-1} & {5}\end{array}\right]\)
Let A = IA
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 14

Question 9.
\(A=\left[\begin{array}{ll}{2} & {3} \\{4} & {5} \\{2} & {1}\end{array}\right] B=\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {-2} & {3} \\{-4} & {2} & {5}\end{array}\right]\)

  1. Find AB
  2. If C is the matrix obtained from A by the transformation R1 → 2R1, find CB

Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 15

(ii) Since C is the matrix obtained from A by the transformation R1 → 2R1
⇒ C = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{4} & {6} \\{4} & {5} \\{2} & {1}\end{array}\right]\)
Then CB can be obtained by multiplying first row of AB by 2.
CB = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{-20} & {-4} & {42} \\{-16} & {2} & {37} \\{-2} & {-2} & {11}
\end{array}\right]\).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 10.
Construct a 3 × 4 matrix whose elements are given by

  1. ay = \(\frac{|-3 i+j|}{2}\) (2)
  2. aij = 2i – j (2)

Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 16
a13 = 0, a14 = \(\frac{1}{2}\), a21 = \(\frac{5}{2}\), a22 = 2, a23 = \(\frac{3}{2}\), a24 = 1, a31 = 4, a32 = \(\frac{7}{2}\), a33 = 3, a34 = \(\frac{5}{2}\)
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 17
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 18
a11 = 1, a12 = 0, a13= -1, a14 = -2, a21 = 3, a22 = 2, a23 = 1, a24 = 0, a31 = 5, a32 = 4, a33 = 3, a34 = 2
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 19

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 11.
Express the following matrices as the sum of a Symmetric and a Skew Symmetric matrix.
(i) \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{6} & {-2} & {2} \\{-2} & {3} & {-1} \\{2} & {-1} & {3}
\end{array}\right]\)
(ii) \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{3} & {3} & {-1} \\{-2} & {-2} & {1} \\{-4} & {-5} & {2}
\end{array}\right]\)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 20
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 21
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 22
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 23

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 12.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{2} & {4} & {3} \\{1} & {0} & {6} \\{0} & {-2} & {-3}\end{array}\right]\)

  1. Find 3A. (1)
  2. Find AT (1)
  3. Evaluate A + AT , is it symmetric? Justify your answer. (1)

Answer:
1. 3A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{6} & {12} & {9} \\{3} & {0} & {18} \\{0} & {-6} & {-9}
\end{array}\right]\)

2. AT = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{2} & {1} & {0} \\{4} & {0} & {-2} \\{3} & {6} & {-3}
\end{array}\right]\)

3. A + AT
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 24
The elements on both sides of the main diagonal are same. Therefore A + AT is a symmetric matrix.

Plus Two Maths Matrices Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Consider the following statement: P(n) : An = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{1+2 n} & {-4 n} \\{n} & {1-2 n}\end{array}\right]\) for all n ∈ N

  1. Write P (1). (1)
  2. If P(k) is true, then show that P( k + 1) is also true. (3)

Answer:
1. P(1) : A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{1+2} & {-4} \\{1} & {1-2}\end{array}\right]=\left[\begin{array}{cc}{3} & {-4} \\{1} & {-1}\end{array}\right]\)

2. Assume that P(n) is true n = k
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 25
Hence P(k+1) is true n ∈ N.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 2.
Find the matrices A and B if 2A + 3B = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {2} & {-1} \\{0{1} & {2} & {4}\end{array}\right]\) and A + 2B = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}{2} & {0} & {1} \\{1} & {1} & {2} \\{3} & {1} & {2}\end{array}\right]\).
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 26
Solving (1) and (2) ⇒ 2 × (2)
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 27
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 28
Question 3.

  1. Construct a 3 × 3 matrix A = [aij] where aij – 2(i – j) (3)
  2. Show that the matrix A is skew-symmetric. (1)

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 29

2.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 30
Therefore A is skew-symmetric matrix.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 4.
Consider the following statement P(n ): An = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{\cos n \theta} & {\sin n \theta} \\{-\sin n \theta} & {\cos n \theta}\end{array}\right]\) for all n ∈ N

  1. Write P(1). (1)
  2. If P (k) is true then show that P (k+1) is true (3)

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 31

2. Assume that P(n) is true for n = k
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 32
P(k+1) = Ak+1
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 33
∴ P(k+1) is true. Hence true for all n ∈ N.

Question 5.
A = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}{1} & {2} & {2} \\{2} & {1} & {2} \\{2} & {2} & {1}\end{array}\right]\), then

  1. Find 4A and A2 (2)
  2. Show that A2 -4A = 5I3 (2)

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 34

2.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 35

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 6.
Let A = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}{2} & {1} & {3} \\{4} & {1} & {0}\end{array}\right]\) and B= \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{1} & {-1} \\{0} & {2} \\{5} & {0}\end{array}\right]\)

  1. Find AT and BT (1)
  2. Find AB (1)
  3. Show that (AB)T = BT AT (2)

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 36

2.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 37

3.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 38
∴ (AB)T = BT AT.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 7.
A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {-3} & {1} \\{2} & {0} & {4} \\{1} & {2} & {-2}\end{array}\right]\) Express A as the sum of a symmetric and skew symmetric matrix.
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 39
\(\frac{1}{2}\) (A + AT) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) (A – AT)
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 40

Question 8.

  1. Consider a 2 × 2 matrix A = [aij], where aij = \(\frac{(i+j)^{2}}{2}\)
  2. Write the transpose of A. (2)
  3. Show that A is symmetric. (2)

Answer:
1. A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{2} & {\frac{9}{2}} \\{\frac{9}{2}} & {8}\end{array}\right]\)

2. AT = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{2} & {\frac{9}{2}} \\{\frac{9}{2}} & {8}\end{array}\right]\)

3. AT = A therefore symmetric matrix.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 9.
A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{6} & {5} \\{7} & {6}\end{array}\right]\) is a matrix

  1. What is the order of A. (1)
  2. Find A2 and 12 A. (2)
  3. If f(x) = xT – 12x +1; find f(A). (1)

Answer:
1. Order of A is 2 × 2.

2.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 41

3. f(x) = x2 – 12x + 1 ⇒ f(A) = A2 – 12A + I
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 42

Plus Two Maths Matrices Six Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Let A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{2} & {4} \\{3} & {2}\end{array}\right]\), B = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{1} & {3} \\{-2} & {5}\end{array}\right]\), C = \(\left[\begin{array}{rr}{-2} & {5} \\{3} & {4}\end{array}\right]\)
Find each of the following
(i) A + B; A – B
(ii) 3A – C
(iii) AB
(iv) BA
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 43
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 44
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 45
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 46

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 2.
Let A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{1} & {2} \\{3} & {4}\end{array}\right]\); B = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{2} & {1} \\{4} & {5}\end{array}\right]\); C = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {-1} \\{0} & {2}\end{array}\right]\)
(i) Find A + B and A – B (2)
(ii) Show that (A + B) + C = A + (B + C) (2)
(iii) Find AB and BA
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 47
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 48
∴ (A + B) + C = A + (B + C)
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 49

Question 3.
A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{-1} & {0} & {2} \\{4} & {0} & {-3}\end{array}\right]\), B = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{0} & {2} \\{-1} & {3} \\{0} & {4}\end{array}\right]\)

  1. What is the order of matrix AB ? (1)
  2. Find AT, BT (2)
  3. Verify (AB)T = BT AT (3)

Answer:
1. Order of AB is 2 × 2. Since order of A is 2 × 3 and B is 3 × 2.

2.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 50

3.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 51
(AB)T = BT AT.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 4.
Let A = \(\left[\begin{array}{rrr}{1} & {2} & {-3} \\{2} & {1} & {-1}\end{array}\right]\), B = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{2} & {3} \\{5} & {4} \\{1} & {6}\end{array}\right]\)
(i) FindAB. (1)
(ii) Find AT, BT & (AB)T (3)
(iii) Verify that (AB)T = BT AT (2)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 52
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 53
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 54

Question 5.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{c}{-2} \\{4} \\{5}\end{array}\right]\), B = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}{1} & {3} & {6}\end{array}\right]\)
(i) Find AT, BT (1)
(ii) Find (AB)T (2)
(iii) Verify (AB)T = BT AT (3)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 55
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 56
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 57

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 6.
Let A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{3} & {1} \\{-1} & {2}\end{array}\right]\)
(i) Find A2 (1)
(ii) Show that A2 – 5A + 7I = 0 (1)
(iii) Using this result find A-1 (2)
(iv) Slove the following equation using matrix: 3x + y = 1, – x + 2y = 2.
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 58
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 59

(iii) A2 – 5A + 7I = 0 ⇒ A2 – 5A = -7I,
multiplying by A-1 on both sides,
⇒ A – 5I = -7 A-1
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 60

(iv) The equation can be represented in matrix form as follows, AX = B ⇒ X = A-1B
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 61

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 7.
A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {2} & {3} \\{3} & {-2} & {1} \\{4} & {2} & {1}
\end{array}\right]\)
(i) Show that A3 – 23A – 40I = 0 (3)
(ii) Hence find A-1 (3)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 62
A3 – 23A – 40I = 0
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 63

(ii) A-1A3 – 23 A-1A – 40A-1I = 0
⇒ A2 – 23I – 40A-1 = 0
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 64

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 8.
A is a third order square matrix and \(a_{i j}=\left\{\begin{aligned}-i+2 j & \text { if } i=j \\i \times j & \text { if } i \neq j\end{aligned} \text { and } B=\left[\begin{array}{lll}{2} & {1} & {1} \\{1} & {1} & {5} \\{1} & {5} & {2}\end{array}\right]\right.\)

  1. Construct the matrix A. (1)
  2. Interpret the matrix A. (1)
  3. Find AB – BA. (3)
  4. Interpret the matrix AB – BA. (1)

Answer:
1. a11 = 1, a12 = 2, a13 = 3, a21 = 2, a22 = 2, a23 = 6, a31 = 3, a32 = 6, a33 = 3
A = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}{1} & {2} & {3} \\{2} & {2} & {6} \\{3} & {6} & {3}\end{array}\right]\)

2. Now,
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 65
Therefore A is symmetric matrix.

3.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 66
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 67

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 68

4.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 69
= -(AB – BA)
∴ skew symmetric matrix.

Question 9.
Find x and y if
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 70
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 71
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 72

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 73
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 74

Question 10.
Given that A + B = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{2} & {5} \\{7} & {8}\end{array}\right]\) and A – B = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{6} & {8} \\{4} & {3}\end{array}\right]\)

  1. Find 2A. (1)
  2. Find A2 – B2. (3)
  3. Is it equal to (A + B) (A – B)? Give reason (2)

Answer:
1. 2A = A + B + A – B
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 75

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

2.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 76

3. (A + B)(A – B)
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 77
(A + B)(A – B) = A2 + AB – BA – B2
≠ A2 – B2
∵ AB ≠ BA.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 11.
(i) Consider A = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}{1} & {x} & {1}\end{array}\right]\), B = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {3} & {2} \\{2} & {5} & {1} \\{15} & {3} & {2}
\end{array}\right]\), C = \(\left[\begin{array}{l}{1} \\{2} \\{x}\end{array}\right]\) (2)

A – MatrixB – Order
A3 × 1
B1 × 1
BC2 × 2
ABC3 × 3
1 × 3

(ii) Find x if ABC = 0 (4)
Answer:
(i)

A – MatrixB – Order
A1 × 3
B3 × 3
BC3 × 1
ABC1 × 1

(ii) Given, ABC = 0
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 78
⇒ x2 + 16x + 28 = 0
⇒ (x + 14)(x + 2) = 0
⇒ x = -14, -2.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Students can Download Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Plus Two Computer Science Web Designing Using HTML One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Name the tag to which the attribute frame is associated.
Answer:
<Table>
Frame attribute specifies the border lines around the table. Possible values are void, box, above, below, hsides, Hsides, Lhs, Rhs Eg. <Table Frame = “below”>

Question 2.
The tag used to create combo in HTML is _______
Answer:
<Select>

Question 3.
The option attribute is associated with _______ <tag>
Answer:
<Select>

Question 4.
Consider the following.
<FRAMESET Cols= “50%, *”>
What will be the output of the above HTML statement?
Answer:
It divides browser window with frames of equal width in column-wise.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML img1

Question 5.
Consider the following.
<FRAMESET Rows= “50%,*”>
What will be the output of the above HTML statement?
Answer:
It divides browser Window into two frames in row-wise equally.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML img2

Question 6.
<Select> Tag create ______ in HTML.
Answer:
Combo box

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 7.
The default align value for a table is ______
(a) Left
(b) Right
(c) Center
(d) Justify
Answer:
(a) Left

Question 8.
A submit button can be created by____ tag
(a) <SUBMIT>
(b) <INPUT>
(c) <SELECT>
(d) <ACTION>
Answer:
(b) <INPUT>

Question 9.
_____ Tag enclosed the heading cells in a table.
(a) <TABLE>
(b) <TR>
(c) <TH>
(d) <TD>
Answer:
(c) <TH>

Question 10.
______ is an empty tag.
(a) <FRAME>
(b) <FORM>
(c) < FRAMESET
(d) <TABLE>
Answer:
(a) <FRAME>

Question 11.
Pick the odd one out. Justify your answer
(a) NOFRAME
(b) Body
(c) SRC
(d) HEAD
Answer:
(c) SRC. It is an attribute. All other are tags.

Question 12.
Name the tag which is used as an attribute to another tag?
Answer:
<Center>or<Frame>

Question 13.
The borderlines around a table is specified by _____ Attribute.
(a) Frame
(b) cellborder
(c) Background
(d) Border
Answer:
(d) Border

Question 14.
To change the background colour of a table, which attribute of <table>tag is used for this purpose.
Answer:
BGCOLOR – This attribute specifies the background colour of the table.
<TABLE B0RDER=2 BGCOLOR= “Blue”>

Question 15.
Which tag is used to divide the window more than one?
Answer:
<Frameset>

Question 16.
_____ tag is used to pass information from web viewers to web server.
Answer:
<Form>

Question 17.
_______ tag provides a label for the form control.
Answer:
<Label>

Question 18.
A_____ has no <body> section.
Answer:
<Frameset> tag

Question 19.
A <frameset> tag no _____ tag.
Answer:
<Body> tag

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 20.
Name the attribute used to merge two or more rows of a table in an HTML document.
Answer:
Rowspan

Question 21.
In HTML ______ tag is used to create a row in a table
Answer:
<TR>

Question 22.
The space between the bonder of the cell and its content can be adjusted by an attribute of the < TABLE > tag. Identify this attribute.
Answer:
Cell padding

Question 23.
Give the value of the frame attribute of <TABLE> tag to get the outer border only.
Answer:
box.

Question 24.
Baiju wants to place a picture in a table cell. Which attribute of the <TD> tag will be used for this.
Answer:
Background

Question 25.
_____ tag forms the definition term in a definition
(a) <DD>
(b) <DT>
(c) <DL>
(d) <DR>
Answer:
(b) <DT>

Question 26.
Name the possible values of type attribute of UnOrdered list.
Answer:
tag <UL> can take values square, circle or disc

Question 27.
To create a list using Upper case letters use ______?
Answer:
<OLType=”A”>

Question 28.
To create a list using Lower case letters use ______?
Answer:
<OLType=”a”>

Question 29.
To start a list from the count of 3 using _____?
Answer:
a <OLstart=”3”>

Question 30.
Mr. Suresh wants to prepare a list of students with register number. But he wants to start numbering from 5? How can it be done using HTML?
Answer:
Ordered list is used for this <OL start = “5”>

Question 31.
Pick the wrong one from the statements given below:
(a) <OL>and <UL> have Type attribute
(b) Default numbering scheme in <OL> is 1,2, 3…
(c) In Definition List, <DD> tag is used to give definition of terms
(d) Start attribute, of ordered list, should always be set to 1
Answer:
(d) Start attribute, of ordered list, should always be set to 1

Question 32.
Which of the following is the correct way to create an email link?
(a) <A href= “abc@xyz”>
(b) <mail href= “abc@xyz”>
(c) <mail> “abc@xyz”>
(d) <A href= “mailto: abc@xyz”>
Answer:
(d) <A href= “mailto: abc@xyz”>

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 33.
There are two web pages in the class project created by Mathew. The second page should appear in the browser when clicked at a particular text in the first page. What do you call this feature? Name the tag and attribute needed for creating such a feautre
Answer:
This feature is called link
Tag used is <A> and attribute is HREF

Question 34.
Observe the table with two rows. Which of the following is used with TD tag to merge the cells C and D?
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML img3
(a) Merge=colspan 2
(b) Rowspan= “2”
(c) Colspan= “2″
(d) Merge=raw2
Answer:
(c) Colspan= “2″

Question 35.
Why do we use <NOFRAME> tag?
Answer:
<NOFRAME> tag is used to give content when some browser that does not support frameset.

Question 36.
Which of the following tag is used to create a list box in a html Form?
(a) <SUBMIT>
(b) <INPUT>
(c) <SELECT>
(d) <ACTION>
Answer:
(c) <SELECT>

Question 37.
The tag used for creating a drop down list in HTML is ______
Answer:
<select> tag

Plus Two Computer Science Web Designing Using HTML Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Manju wants to display 3 web pages on the same screen horizontally. Which HTML statements can be used for this?
Answer:
<Frameset Rows=“33%, *, * ” >
<Frame SRC = Page1. html>
<Frame SRC = Page2. html>
<Frame SRC – Page3. html>
< / Frameset >

Question 2.
Adithya College of Engineering wants to Create its web site, in which the home page is to be designed as a combination of two Vertical panes.
Answer:

  1. Suggest suitable tags used for this.
  2. Write the HTML statements to get this type of page

Answer:
1. < Frame set > and < Frame > tags

2. < Frameset cols = “ 50%, * ” >
< Frame SRC = “ Page1. HTML” >
< Frame SRC = “ Page2. HTML ” >
< / Frameset >

Question 3.
‘Kerala Communication channel’ conducts a TV program based on Education policies of Kerala Govt. They want to take the feedback from the viewers through their website.

  1. While creating this site, which type of tag is used to accept multiple line of text from the viewers,
  2. Name any two attributes of this tag.

Answer:

  1. <TEXTAREA>
  2. Cols, rows, name

Question 4.
Distinguish between cell spacing and cell padding attribute of <Table> tag.
Answer:

  1. Cellspacing: It specifies the space between two table cells
  2. Cellpadding: It specifies the space between cell border and content

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 5.
Match the following.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML img4
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML img5

Question 6.
Differentiate <frame> and <frameset> tags.
Answer:
The <frameset> tag defines the frame sections and the <frame> tag specifies the pages to be loaded in each frame
<FRAMESET> tag And <FRAME>tag Attributes of <FRAMESET>

  • Rows: Used to divide screen in row wise
  • Cols: Used to divide screen in column wise Attributes of <FRAME>
  • SRC: Specifies name of web page to be loaded in Frame
  • Scrolling: Enables the web page displayed to be scrolled

Eg: <FRAMESET Cols=“50%,*”>
< FRAME SRC=“page1.html”>
< FRAME SRC=“page2.html”>
</FRAMESET>

Question 7.
How can you merge cells in a table?
Answer:
By using attributes Colspan or Rowspan
1. colspan: It Is used to span or to stretch a cell, over a number of columns.
Eg: <TD Colspan=3> spans the cell over three columns

2. rowspan: It is used to span or to stretch a cell over a number of rows.
Eg: <TD Rowspan=3> spans the cell over three rows.

Question 8.
Raju created a web page as follows:
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<TITLE>SampieTable</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<TABLE><TR><TH>Roll.No.</TH><TH>Name
</TH><TR>
<TR><TD>1</TD><TD>Raju</TD></TR>
<TR><TD>2</TD><TD>Ramu</TD></TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY>
</HTML>
But he is unable to view any tabular format in the . web page, when it is displayed in the browser.
Find the reason for it and correct the same.
Answer:
Without the “Border” attribute it never shows tabular form, Border attribute is missing.
<TABLE BORDER=3>

Question 9.
Name the possible values of type attribute of Ordered list.
Answer:
Values as follows

  1. type = 1 for 1, 2, 3,….
  2. type = i for i, ii, iii ……..
  3. type = I for I, II, III …….
  4. type = a for a, b, c,…
  5. type = A for A, B, C ………

Question 10.
Predict the output of the following HTML segment.
<OLType = “1” start = “5”>
<Li> Chocolate</Li>
<Li> Milk </Li>
<Li> Coffee</Li>
</OL>
Answer:
5. Chocolate
6. Milk
7. Coffee

Question 11.
Compare the use of Type attribute in Ordered and Unordered list in HTML?
Answer:
1. Unordered List (<UL>) – Items are displayed with square, circle or disc in front.
Eg: <UL TYPE=”circle”>

2. Ordered List (<OL>) – Items are displayed with the following type values.
Type = 1 for 1, 2, 3,
Type = i for i, ii, iii
Type = I for I, II, III
Type = a for a, b, c,
Type = A for A, B, C
Eg: <OLTYPE=”A”>

Question 12.
Differentiate internal linking and external linking with examples.
Answer:
1. External Linking -: Used to connect two different webpages
Eg:<A href = “School. html”> School</A>

2. Internal linking: Internal links are given to a section in the same document.
<A href =“#top”>Goto Top </A>
<A href = “#bottom>Goto Bottom </A>

Question 13.
While moving the mouse pointer over a web page, the mouse pointem changes its shape to hand icon symbol.

  1. Give reason for this change in mouse pointer.
  2. Name the tag and attributes used for it.

Answer:

  1. It is a hyper link
  2. <A> tag, href attribute

Question 14.
HTML has facility to provide external and internal hyper links.

  1. Which tag is used to include a hyperlink?
  2. Explain two attributes needed for creating internal

Answer:

  1. <A>
  2. name, href

Question 15.
Match the following.

EMBEDhref
OLloop
Astart
BGSOUNDhidden

Answer:
EMBED- hidden, OL – start, A – href, BGSOUND – loop

Question 16.
Categorize the following tags into container tags and empty tags.
<A>, <FRAME>, <FRAMESET>, <INPUT>
Answer:
1. Empty tags
<FRAME> & <INPUT>

2. Container tags
<FRAMESET> & <A>

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 17.
The <FORM> tag is used to accept data and communicate with a server program.

  1. Name any two attributes of FORM tag.
  2. How will you create a “SUBMIT” button and a “RESET” button within the FORM tag?

Answer:

  1. Action, Method
  2. <INPUT Type = “submit”>
    <INPUT Type = “reset”>

Question 18.
Aliya wants to display three webpages (A.htm, B.htm, C.htm) on the same screen horizontally at the ratio 20%, 40%, 40%. Write the HTML code for the same.
Answer:
<FRAMESET ROWS=”20%, 40%, 40%”>
<FRAME Src= “A.html”>
<FRAME Src= “B.html”>
<FRAME Src= “C.html”>
</FRAMESET >

Question 19.
Distinguish Cellspacing and Cellpadding attributes of <TABLE> tag.
Answer:
Cell spacing: Specifies space between table cells Cell padding- Specifies space between cell border and content.

Plus Two Computer Science Web Designing Using HTML Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Point out the difference between relative and absolute URL.
Answer:
URL means uniform Resource Locator.
Two type of URL
1. Relative URL – Here we explicitly give the web site address
Eg: <A href=http://www.hscap.kerala.gov.in>

2. Absolute URL – Here we implicitly give the web site address. The path is not specified here.
Eg: Consider the web pages index.html and school.html saved in folder C:\BVM.The file indexs.html contains the following.
<A href=”school.html”>. Here we did not specify the full path of the file school.html. But this implicitly points to the file stored in C:\BVM

Question 2.
Name the tag which is used to play the music in background while the webpage is being viewed.
Answer:
<BGSOUND>
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<Title> Table </Title>
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<Table Border = “1”>
<TR align = “Center”>
<TH COLSPAN = “2” > ANIMALS</TH>
</TR>
<TR align-‘center”>
<TD> WILD <BR>BEAR, TIGER</TD> <TD>DOMESTIC <BR>GOAT, DOG</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY>
</HTML>

Question 3.
Differentiate <FRAME>, <FRAMESET> and <NOFRAME> tags.
Answer:

  1. <FRAMESET> tag is used to divide the window more than one pane. It has no body section.
  2. <FRAME> It specifies the pages within a frameset.
  3. <NOFRAME> <NOFRAME> tag is used to give content when some browser that does not support frameset.

Question 4.
In a web page, user needs to enter the address of persons. Name the tag used for this. List and explain any two main attributes of it.
Answer:
<TEXTAREA>. This is used to enter multiple lines in a Text Box of a web page. Main attributes are

  1. Rows: Specifies the height of text area control, ie. The number of Lines the Text Area should have
  2. Cols: Specifies width ie number of characters per line.
  3. Name: Gives a variable name to the Text Area control. Eg: <TEXTAREA Name = ”Address” Cols = 20 Rows = 5>

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 5.
Consider the following table.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML img6
Write the HTML code for the above.
Answer:
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<TITLE>TABLE</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<CENTER><B>TABLE</CENTER>
<TABLE BORDER = 1>
<TR>
<TH>Batch</TH>
<TH>Boys</TH>
<TH>Girls</TH>
</TR>
<TR>
<TH>Science</th>
<TD>25</TD>
<TD>26</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TH>COMMERCE</TH>
<TD>20</TD>
<TD>30</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY>
</HTML>

Question 6.
Name the tag which permits a user to add more than one web page in a single window. List any attributes of it with explanation.
Answer:
<FRAMESET> tag and <FRAME>tag Attributes of <FRAMESET>

  1. Rows: Used to divide screen in row wise
  2. Cols: Used to divide screen in column wise Attributes of <FRAME>
  3. SRC: Specifies name of web page to be loaded in Frame
  4. NAME: Gives a name for the frame.

Eg. <FRAMESET Rows= “50%,*”>
<FRAME SRC= “page1.html”> <FRAMESRC=“page2.htm”>
</FRAMESET>

Question 7.
In VB, a Programmer can use Option Button, Text Box, Combo box, etc. to accept inputs from the user. But in HTML <INPUT> tag is used for creating ail the above controls. Which attributes of the <INPUT> tag is used for this. List and explain the possible values of it.
Answer:
The ‘type’ attribute of <INPUT> tag is used to create different control. The main values of type attribute is given below.

  1. Text: Creates a single line Text Box. Eg. <INPUT Type= “Text”>
  2. Password: creates a password box in which characters are displayed by symbols like asterisk(*) Eg. <INPUTType= “Password”>
  3. Check Box: Creates a check box. Eg. INPUT Type = “Check Box”>
  4. Radio: Creates option button (Radio Button) Eg. <INPUT Type= “Radio” Name=“sex” Value= “M”>Male
  5. Reset: Creates reset button. It is used to clear all the data entered Eg. <INPUT Type=“Reset”>
  6. Submit: Creates a submit Button. When click on it data Entered in the form will sent to web server. Eg. INPUT Type = “Submit”>

Question 8.
Write the HTML code for the following.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML img7
Answer:
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<TITLE>TABLE</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<TABLE BORDER = ”1”>
<TR>
<TH> Computer </TH>
<TH> Acer </TH>
<TH>HP</TH>
</TR>
<TR>
<TH>PC</TH>
<TD>30,000</TD>
<TD>32,000</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TH>Laptop</TH>
<TD colspan = 2>40,000</TD>
</TR>
</Table>
</Body>
</HTML>

Question 9.
Write the HTML Code for the following.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML img8
Answer:
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<TITLE>TABLE EXAMPLE</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<TABLE BORDER = ‘1’>
<TR>
<TH>Subject</TH>
<TH>Type of<BR>Exam</TH>
<TH>Mark</TH>
</TR>
<TR>
<TH Rowspan=2>Computer<BR>Application</TH> <TH>Theory</TH>
<TD>42</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TH>Practical</TH>
<TD>26</TD>
</TR>
</Table>
</Body>
</HTML>

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 10.
Name the attributes in HTML, which can present in more than one tag.
Answer:
The attributes are

  1. Border: lt can act in <Table> and in <Frameset>Tag.
  2. Bgcolor: It can act in <Table> and in <Body>tag.
  3. Type: It can act in <OL> and in <lnput>tag.

Question 11.
What are the main attributes of the <Form> tag?
Answer:
1. Method:
It determines the method of submission of form data to the server. Get and Post are the two form submission methods. Post method is used to pass large volume of data. Also, post method is more secure as data entered is not visible during submission. The get method is faster and is used to send lesser volume of data and it is not secure.

2. Action:
The URL of the server side program to process the form data is specified by the Action attribute.
Eg: <Form Action=”http://www.scert.com/asp/. process. asp”>

Question 12.
What are the difference between get method and post method?
Answer:

Post MethodGet Method
It is used to pass large volume of data
The data is not visible during submission
It is slower.
It is secure.
It is used to pass lesser volume of date
The data is visible, during submission
It is faster
It is not secure

Question 13.
Lena wants to create a web page, to select the district name from a combo. By default the combo box contain the district Trichur. Help her to do so.
Answer:
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<TITLE>COMBOBOX</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY>
DISTRICT
<SELECT>
<OPTION SELECTED>TRICHUR <OPTION>ERNAKULAM <OPTION>PALAKKAD </SELECT>
</BODY>
</HTML>

Question 14.
Ram creates a web page to record the sex of a student. But he has made a mistake that the student can select both male and female choices at a time. What is the reason for the same? Help him to correct the mistake.
Answer:
To record sex of student radio buttons are used. Usu-ally radio buttons are provided as a group from which exactly one can be selected at a time by giving the same name for both radio buttons. But here Ram did not give same narfie for both buttons. Therefore the mistake. The correct code is as follows,
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<TITLE>RADIO BUTTON</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY>
sex<input type=”radio” name=’’sex” value= “Male”> Male
<input type=”radio” name=”sex” value= “Female”> Female
</BODY>
</HTML>

Question 15.
Explain the attributes of <Frameset> Tag.
Answer:

  1. Cols: It determines the dimension of vertical frames(Columns) in the frameset page. Eg: <Frameset Cols=”50%,*”> creates two vertical frames with equal width
  2. Rows: It determines the dimension of horizontal frames(Rows) in the frameset page. Eg: <Frameset Rows=”50%,*”> creates two horizontal frames with equal height.
  3. Border: It specifies the thickness of the border for the frames.
  4. Border color: It specifies the colour for the frame border.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 16.
Explain the attributes of <Frame tag>
Answer:

  1. Src: It specifie the URL of the document to be loaded in the frame.
  2. Scrolling: It indicates scroll bar is to be shown in the frame or not, values are yes, no or auto
  3. No resize: It stops the resizing of the frame, no value is to be assigned.
  4. Margin width and Marginheight: It sets the hori¬zontal and vertical margins, values are in pixels.
  5. Name: It gives a name for the frame.
  6. Target: It specifies the target frame.

Question 17.
Mr. Sonet visited a website that contains two frames. He tries to resize the first frame by mouse.But he failed to do so. What is the reason behind. Explain?
Answer:
This is because the web designer used Noresize attribute of frame tag while he design the page. No resize attribute stops the resizing of the frame, no value is to be assigned.
Eg: <frame src=”page1.html” noresize>

Question 18.
We know that an HTML document contains two sec¬tions head and body section. While designing a web page as follows what will happen?
Answer:
<html>
<head>
</head>
<body>
<frameset cols=”50%,*”>
<frame src=”page1 .html” noresize> <frame src=”page2.html”>
</frameset>
</body>
</html>
There is no output because a <frameset> tag has no body tag. It is very important. So the correct code is as follows,
<html>
<head>
</head>
<frameset cols=”50%,*”>
<frame src=”page1 .html” noresize>
<frame src=”page2.html”>
</frameset>
</html>

Question 19.
Create a web page as follows to display a list contains items.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML img9
Answer:
T0 create a list box set the size property of <Select> tag to more than 1.
<html>
<head>
</head>
<body>
House Hold ltems<Br>
<select size=3>
<option>TV
<option>Fridge
<option selected>Washing Machine </select>
</body>
</html>

Question 20.
In VB there are separate controls to create List Box and Combo Box. But in HTML these controls can be created by using a single tag.

  1. Name the tag used for this?
  2. Which attribute is used for this and how?

Answer:
1. < SELECT >

2. Size attribute
< SELECT Size = 1> gives combo box
< SELECT Size = 3> gives a list box

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 21.
Write HTML code for creating the following webpage using tag.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML img10
Answer:
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<TITLE>List Tag</TITLE.
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<H2 Align=”centre” ><B>Net Link Ltd></ B><H2><BR>
<H2 Align=”centre”><B>Bangalore></B></H2><BR>
<HR>
<B>Our products</B>
<BR>
<OLtype=1>
<LI>Television <LI>Washing Machine <UL>
<LI><Model 2005XP Series <LI> Model 2006 ST Series </UL>
</OL>
</Body>
</HTML>

Question 22.
Write the HTML code for creating the following web page using List tag.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML img11
Answer:
HTML>
<HEAD>
<TITLE>Definition List Tag</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<H1 Align= “center“><B>COMPUTER TERMS</B>< H1><BR>
<DL>
<DT>CPU
<DD>Central Processing Unit <DT>ALU
<DD>Arithmetic and Logic Unit <DT>WWW <DD>World Wide Web </DL>
</BODY>
</HTML>

Question 23.
What will be the output of the following?
<html>
<head>
</head>
<body>
<OL type=”A” start=5>
<LI>COMPUTER
<LI>BIOLOGY
</OL>
</body>
</html>
Answer:
The output is as follows
E.COMPUTER, F.BIOLOGY

Question 24.
Find the errors from the following and correct it.

  1. <ULtype=”A” start=5>
  2. <IMG src=”picture.jpg”size=100>
  3. <HTML>
    <HEAD><TITLE></HEAD></TITLE> <BODY>This is a sample web page</BODY>

Answer:

  1. UL has only specified types and has no start attribute
  2. IMG has no size attribute, use height or width attribute
  3. <HTML>
    <HEAD><TITLE></TITLE></HEAD> <BODY>This is a sample web page</BODY> </HTML>

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 25.
Your brother requested you to prepare a list of best friends, from your class using HTML.

  1. Which type of list you will prefer?
  2. Write HTML code to create such a list of 4 students.

Answer:
1. Ordered List<OL> Can be used

2. <HTML>
<HEAD>
<Title>list<Title>
</HEAD>
<BODY>< center><B><U>List of best studentsc/ B></U></Center>
<OL type=1>
<LI> Christeena
<LI>Vijitha
<LI>Archa
<U>Tija
</OL>
</BODY>
</HTML>

Question 26.
Ravi wants to display the name of 6 subjects as a list by using Upper case Roman Numerals. Help him to do so.
Answer:
<OL type= “I”>
<LI>English
<LI> Sanskrit
<LI>Business studies
<LI>Accountancy
<LI>Economics
<LI>Computer Applications
</OL>

Question 27.
Your class selected you as the group leader of Group V. In your group there are 5 students with Roll No. 20 to 24. Prepare a list using appropriate tag in HTML.
Answer:
<html>
<head>
<title>
Ordered list </title>
</head>
<body>
<B><U>Group V</U></B>
<OL start = 20>
<LI>Manisha
<LI>Anisha
<LI>Nisha
<LI>lsha
<LI>Sha
</OL>
</body>
</html>

Question 28.
Write HTML code to get the following output.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML img12
Answer:
<html>
<head>
<title>
Unordered list </title>
</head>
<body>
<OL type=”a”> <LI><B>Computer</B> <UL >
<LI>Laptop
<LI>desktop
</UL>
</OL>
</body>
</html>

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 29.
Write HTML code to get the following table as output.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML img13
Answer:
<html>
<head>
<title>
Table
</title>
</head>
<body>
<table border=1> <tr>
<th>Name
<th>Score
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Raju
<td>90
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Reena
<td>84
</tr>
</table>
</body>
</html>

Question 30.
Write the tags to define the following:

  • Text Box
  • Subnnit Button
  • Reset Button
  • Radio Button

Answer:

  • .<input type=”text” name=”txtname”>
  • .<input type=”Submit” value=”Send”>
  • .<input type=”Reset” value=”Clear”>
  • .<input type=”Radio” name=”Sex” value= “Male”>Male <input type=”Radioi’ name=”Sex’’ value=” Female”>Female

Plus Two Computer Science Web Designing Using HTML Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Write an HTML code to create a web page with 3 frames as shown below:
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML img14
Answer:
Step 1: Take a notepad, type the following and save it as main.html on Desktop.
<html>
<head>
<title>
Main page </title>
</head>
<body bgcolor = “red”>
<center> main page.
</center>
</body>
</html>

Step 2: Take another notepad, type the following and save it as page1.html on Desktop.
<html>
<head>
<title>
pagel
</title>
</head>
<body bgcolor = “yellow”>
<center> page 1 </center>
</body>
</html>

Step 3: Take another notepad, type the following and save it as page 2.html on Desktop.
<html>
<head>
<title> page 2 </title>
</head>
<body bgcolor = “blue”>
<center> page 2 </center>
</body>
</html>

step 4: Take another notepad, type the following and save it as frame.html on Desktop.
<html>
<head>
<title> frame </title>
</head>
<frameset rows = “30%, *”>
<frame src = “main.html ”>
<frameset cols = “50%, *”>
<frame src = “page1.html”>
<frame src= “page2.htmr>
</frameset>
</frameset>
</html>

Step 5. Finally run the frame.html file.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 2.
Explain any three attributes of <FORM>tag.
Answer:
1. Action – Here we give the name of program (including the path) stored in the Webserver.

2. Method – There are 2 types of methods get and post.

Get methodPost method
1. Faster1. Slower
2. To send small volume of data2. To send large volume of data
3. Less secure3. More secure
4. Data visible during submission4. Data not visible during submission

3. Target – Specifies the target window for displaying the result. Values are given below.

  • _blank-Opens in a new window
  • _self-Opens in the same frame
  • _parent – Opens in the parent frameset
  • _top-Opens in the main browser window
  • name – Opens in the window with the specified name.

Question 3.
Explain the attributes of <Table> tag?
Name any six attributes of <table> tag that determine the general layout of table.
Answer:

  1. Border: It specifies the thickness of the border lines around the table
  2. Bordercolor: It specifies the colour for border lines
  3. Align: It specifies the table alignment, the values can b,e left, right or center
  4. Bgcolor: It specifies the back ground colour for the table.
  5. Cellspacing: It specifies the space between two table cells
  6. Cellpadding: It specifies the space between cell border and content
  7. Cols: It specifies the number of columns
  8. Width: It determines the table width
  9. Frame: It specifies the border lines around the table, values are void, border, box, above, below,…

Question 4.
Explain the attributes of <TH> and <TD>?
Answer:

  1. Align: It specifies the horizontal alignment of the content, the values can be left, right, center and justify.
  2. Valign: It specifies the vertical alignment of the content, the values can be top, middle, Bottom, and baseline.
  3. Bgcolor: It specifies the background colour for the cell.
  4. Colspan: It is used to span or to stretch a cell over a number of columns. Eg: <TD Colspan=3> spans the cell over three columns
  5. Rowspan: It is used to span or to stretch a cell over a number of rows. Eg: <TD Rowspan=3> spans the cell over three rows.

Question 5.
Create an HTML page as shown below using lists.
The recipe for preparation
1. The ingredients
•100g flour
• 10g sugar
• 1 cup water
• 2 egg
• Salt and pepper

2. The procedure
A. Mix dry ingredients thoroughly
B. Pour in wet ingradients
C. Mix for 10 mts
D. Bake for 1 hr at 100 degree C temperature <HTML>
Answer:
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<TITLE>
List Demo </TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY Bgcolor = “Green”>
The recipe for preparation <OL>
<LI> The ingredients </LI>
<ULtype=”disc”>
<LI> 100 g flour </LI>
<LI> 10 g Sugar </LI>
<LI> 1 cup water </LI>
<LI>2egg </LI>
<LI> Salt and pepper </LI>
</UL>
<LI> The procedure </LI>
<OL TYPE =”A”>
<LI> Mix dry ingredients thoroughly </LI>
<LI> Pour in wet ingredients </LI>
<LI> Mix for 10 mts </LI>
<LI> Bake for 1 hr at 100 degree C temperature </LI>
</OL>
</OL>
</BODY>
</HTML>

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 6.
Create HTML code for the following output.
1. Flowers
• Jasmine
• Rose
• Lily
2. Vegetables
• Beetroot
• Cabbage
• Cucumber
3. Fruits
i. Apple
ii. Orange
iii. Pineapple
Answer:
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<TITLE>
Nested List </TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY Bgcolor = “Blue”> <OL>
<LI> Flowers </LI>
<UL TYPE=”disc”>
<LI> Jasmine </LI>
<LI> Rose </LI> <LI>Lily</LI>
</UL>
<LI> Vegetables </LI>
<ULTYPE=”disc”>
<LI>Beetroot</LI>
<LI>Cabbage</LI>
<LI>Cucumber</LI>
</UL>
<LI> Fruits</LI>
<OL type=T> <LI>Apple</LI> <LI>Orange</LI> <LI>Pineapple</LI>
</OL> </OL>
</BODY>
</HTML>

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Inverse Trigonometric Functions

Students can Download Chapter 2 Inverse Trigonometric Functions Questions and Answers, Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Inverse Trigonometric Functions

Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Prove the following
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 3 Mark Questions and Answers 1
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 3 Mark Questions and Answers 2

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Inverse Trigonometric Functions
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 3 Mark Questions and Answers 3
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 3 Mark Questions and Answers 4

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Inverse Trigonometric Functions

Question 2.
Find the value of
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 3 Mark Questions and Answers 5
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 3 Mark Questions and Answers 6

Question 3.
If tan-1x + tan-1y + tan-1z = π, show that x + y + z = xyz
Answer:
Given;
tan-1x + tan-1y + tan-1z = π
⇒ tan-1x + tan-1y = π – tan-1z
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 3 Mark Questions and Answers 7
⇒ x + y + z = xyz.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Inverse Trigonometric Functions

Question 4.
Match the following
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 3 Mark Questions and Answers 8
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 3 Mark Questions and Answers 9

Question 5.
Solve 2 tan-1(cos x) = tan-1(2 cos x)
Answer:
2 tan-1(cosx) = tan-1(2cosx)
⇒ \(\frac{2 \cos x}{1-\cos ^{2} x}\) = 2cosx
⇒ 1 = 1 – cos2 x ⇒ 1 = sin2x
⇒ x = ±\(\frac{\pi}{2}\).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Inverse Trigonometric Functions

Question 6.
Solve the following

  1. 2tan-1(cosx) = tan-1(2cosecx)
  2. tan-12x + tan-13x = \(\frac{\pi}{4}\)

Answer:
1. 2tan-1(cosx) = tan-1(2cosecx)
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 3 Mark Questions and Answers 10

2. tan-12x + tan-13x = \(\frac{\pi}{4}\)
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 3 Mark Questions and Answers 11
⇒ (6x – 1)(x + 1) = 0
⇒ x = \(\frac{1}{6}\), x = – 1
Since x = – 1 does not satisfy the equation, as the LHS becomes negative. So x = \(\frac{1}{6}\).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Inverse Trigonometric Functions

Question 7.
Solve 2 tan-1(cos x) = tan-1(2 cos x)
Answer:
2 tan-1(cos x) = tan-1(2 cos x)
⇒ \(\frac{2 \cos x}{1-\cos ^{2} x}\) = 2cosx
⇒ 1 = 1 – cos2 x
⇒ 1 = sin2 x ⇒ x = ±\(\frac{\pi}{2}\)

Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Prove that \(\sin ^{-1} \frac{12}{13}+\cos ^{-1} \frac{4}{5}+\tan ^{-1} \frac{63}{16}=\pi\)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 4 Mark Questions and Answers 12

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Inverse Trigonometric Functions
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 4 Mark Questions and Answers 13

Question 2.

  1. Find the principal value of sec-1\(\left(-\frac{2}{\sqrt{3}}\right)\) (1)
  2. if sin\(\left(\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{1}{5}\right)+\cos ^{-1}(x)\right)=1\), then find the value of x. (3)

Answer:
1. principal value of:
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 4 Mark Questions and Answers 14

2. find the value of x:
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 4 Mark Questions and Answers 15

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Inverse Trigonometric Functions

Question 3.
Solve the following
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 4 Mark Questions and Answers 16
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 4 Mark Questions and Answers 17

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Inverse Trigonometric Functions
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 4 Mark Questions and Answers 18
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 4 Mark Questions and Answers 19
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 4 Mark Questions and Answers 20
The value x = –\(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{\sqrt{28}}\) makes the LHS negative, so rejected.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Inverse Trigonometric Functions

Question 4.
(i) Choose the correct answer from the bracket. cos(tan-1 x), |x| < 1 is equal to (1)
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 4 Mark Questions and Answers 21
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 4 Mark Questions and Answers 22
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 4 Mark Questions and Answers 23
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 4 Mark Questions and Answers 24
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 4 Mark Questions and Answers 25
(draw a right triangle to convert ‘tan’ to ‘sin’).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Inverse Trigonometric Functions

Question 5.
(i) In which quadrants are the graph of cos-1 (x) lies, x ∈ [-1,1 ] (1)
(ii) If cos-1x + cos-1y = \(\frac{\pi}{3}\), then
sin-1x + sin-1y = ……… (3)
(a) \(\frac{2 \pi}{3}\)
(b) \(\frac{\pi}{3}\)
(c) \(\frac{\pi}{6}\)
(d) \(\frac{\pi}\)
(iii) If tan-1x + tan-1y = \(\frac{\pi}{4}\) then prove that x + y + xy = 1 (2)
Answer:
(i) First and Second quadrant
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 4 Mark Questions and Answers 27
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 4 Mark Questions and Answers 28
⇒ x + y = 1 – xy ⇒ x + y + xy = 1.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Inverse Trigonometric Functions

Question 6.
(i) sin(tan-1(1)) is equal to
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 4 Mark Questions and Answers 29
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 4 Mark Questions and Answers 30
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 4 Mark Questions and Answers 31
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 4 Mark Questions and Answers 32

Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions Six Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Show that sin-1\(\frac{3}{5}\) – sin-1\(\frac{8}{17}\) = cos-1\(\frac{84}{85}\).
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 6 Mark Questions and Answers 34
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 6 Mark Questions and Answers 35
(draw a right triangle to convert ‘tan’ to ‘cos’).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Inverse Trigonometric Functions

Question 2.
(i) Choose the correct answer from the Bracket.
If cos-1x = y, then y is equal to (1)
(a) π ≤ y ≤ π
(b) 0 ≤ y ≤ π
(c) \(-\frac{\pi}{2}\) ≤ y ≤ \(\frac{\pi}{2}\)
(d) 0 ≤ y ≤ π
(ii) Find the value of cos-1 cos\(\left(\frac{7 \pi}{3}\right)\) (3)
(iii) Solve for x if, tan-1\(\left(\frac{1+x}{1-x}\right)\) = 2 tan-1x (2)
Answer:
(i) Range of cos-1x is [0, π] ⇒ 0 ≤ y ≤ π

(ii) Here \(\left(\frac{7 \pi}{3}\right)\) lie outside the interval [0, π]. TO make it in the interval proceed as follows.
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 6 Mark Questions and Answers 36
Plus Two Maths Inverse Trigonometric Functions 6 Mark Questions and Answers 37

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Students can Download Chapter 4 Web Technology Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Plus Two Computer Science Web Technology One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Specify an attribute of the HTML tag.
Answer:
DIR: Indicates documents direction. It can take values rtl or ltr.
Eg. <HTML DIR= “rtl”> This specify that document is to read from right to left.

Question 2.
Mention the default value of size attribute of <BASEFONT> tag.
Answer:
3.

Question 3.
Name the tag which has ‘Noshade’ attribute.
Answer:
<HR>Tag

Question 4.
Maximum possible value of the size attribute of the <BASEFONT>tag?
Answer:
7.

Question 5.
Salim developed a personal website. In which he has to create an e-mail link. Can you suggest the protocol used to achieve this task?
Answer:
Mailto.
Eg. <A href= “Mailto:[email protected]” >Mail to me</A>.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 6.
You want to connect your webpage to the web portal www.yahoo.com. Mention the tag that can be used for this.
Answer:
<A> Anchor Tag
Eg. <Ahref=”www. yahoo.com”>Yahoo</A)

Question 7.
Specify the main attribute of <IMG> tag used to include an image file in web page.
Answer:
SRC. It specify the name of the image file to be included in the page.
Eg. <IMG SRC= “C:/home.Jpg”>

Question 8.
Select the attribute associated with <IMG> tag from the following: (Name, size, Align, value)
Answer:
Align

Question 9.
Write HTML code forgiving hyperlink in webpage.
Answer:
<A HREF= “page2.htm”>Page2</A>

Question 10.
The default colour of Vlink is ________
(a) Blue
(b) Green
(c) Red
(d) Yellow
Answer:
(c) Red

Question 11.
ThedefauKcolour of A link is ________
(a) Blue
(b) Green
(c) Red
(d) Yellow Green
Answer:
(b) Green

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 12.
Saritha is assigned the task of writing explanatory notes in an HTML code. Which tag she can utilize.
Answer:
Explanatory notes can be given using <comment> tag. Using two mark up elements. as<!— and →

Question 13.
Pick the odd man out.
(a) BODY
(b) HTML
(c) CENTER
(d) ALIGN
Answer:
(d) ALIGN, all others are tag

Question 14.
Your school has a web site, www.myschool.otg. You want to create a link to this site from your website. Write the code for implementing this.
Answer:
<A href=”www.myschool.org”>My School</A>

Question 15.
HTML was developed by ________
Answer:
Tim Berners-Lee

Question 16.
What are the two major sections of an HTML document?
Answer:
Head section and Body section

Question 17.
An HTML file is saved with _____ extension.
(a) .vbp
(b) .mdb
(c) .htm
(d) .frm
Answer:
(c) .htm or .html

Question 18.
The software used to view web page is _____
(a) Notepad
(b) web browser
(c) Webserver
(d) Web Editor
Answer:
(b) web browser

Question 19.
The default alignment of image in HTML is _____
(a) Left
(b) Right
(c) Center
(d) Inline with content
Answer:
(a) Left

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 20.
_______ is an alternative for centralizing a paragraph other than using <P> tag
(a) <AUGN>
(b) <C>
(c) <CENTER>
(d) <CENTRE
Answer:
(c) <CENTER>

Question 21.
______ attribute Of <A> tag specifies the URL of the hyper linked document.
(a) Name
(b) Target
(c) HREF
(d) SRC
Answer:
(c) HREF

Question 22.
What does HTML stands for?
Answer:
Hyper Text Markup Language

Question 23.
Communication on web can be classified into _____ and ______ .
Answer:
Client to Server and Server to Server

Question 24.
The protocol which is responsible for splitting the data into smaller packets is _____
Answer:
TCP.

Question 25.
The protocol which is responsible for the routing of data packets through the correct destination is _____
Answer:
IP (Internet Protocol)

Question 26.
TCP/IP stands for
Answer:
Transmission Control Protocol/lntenet Protocal

Question 27.
Identify the protocol responsible for e-mail communication.
Answer:
(a) DNS
(b) HTTP
(c) TCP/IP
(d) SMTP
Answer:
(d) SMTP

Question 28.
In server to server communication, authentication is done with help of _____
(a) HTTP
(b) Digital certificate
(c) Client
(d) DNS
Answer:
(b) Digital certificate

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 29.
Which server acts between merchant server and bank server for transferring data in encrypted format?
Answer:
Payment Gateway

Question 30.
Identify the name of a place where servers and networking systems are placed with high security.
(a) Head office
(b) DNS
(c) Data centre
(d) IIS
Answer:
(c) Data centre

Question 31.
Identify the port number which requests for the service of sending e-mail communication.
(a) 22
(b) 25
(c) 53
(d) 80
Answer:
(b) 25

Question 32.
The IP address corresponding to a domain name is ______ presenting server.
Answer:
DNS

Question 33.
Programs embedded in HTML documents are termed as ______
Answer:
Scripts

Question 34.
Running of ____ scripts can be blocked by the user
(a) Client side
(b) Server side .
(c) Both client side and server side.
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Client side

Question 35.
A platform-independent serverside scripting language is ______
Answer:
PHP

Question 36.
Which among the following tools is used for easy formatting and defining style of a document written in HTML?
(a) Ajax
(b) CSS
(c) JSP
(d) JavaScript
Answer:
(b) CSS

Question 37.
Pick the Odd one from the following list and give reason. (IMG, FONT, BR, ALIGN, PRE)
Answer:
ALIGN which is an attribute, all others are tags.

Question 38.
Choose the correct HTML statement to display an image with file name “kerala.jpg” as the background of the web page.
(a) <IMG src=”kerala.jpg”>
(b) <BODYbgcolor=”kerala.jpg”>
(c) <BODY src=”kerala.jpg”>
(d) <BODY background=”kerala.jpg”>
Answer:
(d) <BODYbackground=”kerala.jpg”>

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 39.
Two of the following HTML tags have same attribute ‘Align’. Identify them.
(<IMG>, <MARQUEE>, <B>, <P>, <BODY>)
Answer:
<IMG> AND <P>

Question 40.
Identify the correct HTML statement to draw a horizontal line with half the width of the screen.
(a) <HR width=“50%” size= “3″>
(b) <HR size= “50%” width= “3″>
(c) <HR length=“50%” size= “3″>
(d) <HR width= “50%” length= “3″>
Answer:
(a) <HR width=“50%” size= “3″>

Question 41.
A student wants to display a poem in a web page just like as he entered in the text editor. Which tag in HTML will help him?
Answer:
<PRE>tag

Question 42.
A student created a web page about his school. The school name is displayed in the page. He wanted to change the style, colour, and size of the school name. Identify the most appropriate tag in HTML needed for that.
Answer:
<FONT> tag

Plus Two Computer Science Web Technology Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A student developed a web page about India. He wanted to display a scrolling text moving from right side to left side with a background colour blue.
The text is “I Love My Country”.

  1. Identify the tag needed for it.
  2. Write the HTML statement to do the task.

Answer:

  1. <MARQUEE>
  2. <MARQUEE direction=”left” bgcolor=”blue” > I Love My country </MARQUEE>

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 2.
Write HTML statement for displaying the following text items:

  1. A2B3
  2. A>B

Answer:

  1. A <SUB>2</SUB> B <SUP>3</SUP>
  2. A&gt;B

Question 3.
Two HTML tags are given. They are <BODY> and <FONT>. Identify and write the attribute of each from the following list. (Size, Text, Link, Bgcolor, Color)
Answer:
The attributes of <BODY> tag are Text, Link and Bgcolor The attributes of <FONT> tag are size and color.

Question 4.
Write the use of Border and Alt attribute of <IMG> tag.
Answer:
Border: This attribute is used forgiving border to an image
Alt: This attribute is sued for giving an alternate text. When there is no image in the specified location or the browser doesn’t support the image them this text will be displayed.

Question 5.
When a client send request to a server, the server must know which service is demanded by the client.

  1. How does the server identify the type of service requested?
  2. Write the name of any one of the services in the Webserver.

Answer:

  1. Port number
  2. Any service like FTP, SMTP, HTTP etc

Question 6.
Following are steps for searching the IP address of a domain name by a browser. Rearrange them in proper order.

  1. Look in the local memory of ISP
  2. Look in the DNS servers starting from the root server .
  3. Look in the local memory of brower
  4. Look in the local memory of Operating System

Answer:
Correct order is 3, 4, 1, 2

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 7.
Categorise the following tags into Container tags and empty tags.
<B>, <BR>, <A>,<FRAME>, <FRAMESET>, <LI>, <HR>
Answer:
1. Container tags:
<B>, <A>,<FRAMESET>

2. Empty tags:
<BR>, <HR>, <LI>, <FRAME>

Question 8.
Write the HTML statement to get the following output.

  1. Commerce
  2. Humanities

Answer:

  1. <B>Commerce</B>
  2. <l>Humanities</l>

Question 9.
Write the HTML statement to get the following output.

  1. H2SO4
  2. a2 + b2
  3. Computer

Answer:

  1. H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub>
  2. a<sup>2</sup> + b<sup>2</sup>
  3. <b>Computer</b>

Question 10.
Write HTML code to display as follows.
The <IMG> tag is used for placing images
Answer:
The &lt IMG &gt tag is used for placing images.

Question 11.
Name some browsers.
Answer:

  1. Internet Explorer
  2. Netscape Navigator
  3. Opera
  4. Eudora

Question 12.
What is a website?
Answer:
A website is a collection of webpages. A webpage is created by using HTML tags.

Question 13.
What is the role of attributes in an HTML tag?
Answer:
Attributes are parameters for providing additional information within a tag. Attribute values specify certain characteristics of the tag.
Eg: <P align=”right”>

Question 14.
What is HTML?
Answer:
HTML stands for HyperText Markup Language. It is used to create web pages. It has two types of tags empty and container. The important thing we have to remember in container tag is first opened tag must be closed last.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 15.
Name the main attributes of the <HR> tag.
Answer:

  • Size: It specifies the line thickness
  • Width: It specifies the length
  • Noshade: It specifies no shade is given for the line.
  • Color: It specifies the color.

Question 16.
Mary wants to display her name in various head-ings. Name the heading tags available in HTML.
Answer:
Heading can be given in six levels from <H1> to <H6>.The tag <H1> produces big heading. The tag <H6> produces small heading. The heading size re¬duce from <H1> to <H6> sequentially.

Question 17.
Differentiate between <FONT> and <BASEFONT>tags
Answer:
<BASEFONT>tag sets the normal font for the entire document text. The font specified will be taken as the default font for the entire document. The main attributes are size, face, and color. The <FONT> tag defines the font characteristics of the text enclosed. <Font> tag change the font property of the text enclosed within <Font> and </Font> whereas <BaseFont> tag specifies the default font characteristics.

Question 18.
Explain the different types of hyperlinks.
Answer:
The two types of Hyper Links are

  1. External HyperLink: This is used two connect the locations of two different web pages
  2. Internal HyperLink: This is used to connect the different locations of the same web page

Question 19.
Write the HTML code to display the following list:

  • Form
  • TextBox
  • Label
  • Command Button

Answer:
<html>
<head>
<title>
list
</title>
</head>
<body bgcolor=”vbcyan”>
<ul type=”circle”>
<li>Form
<li>TextBox
<li>Label
<li>CommandButton</ul>
</body>
</html>

Question 20.
The body section forms the content displayed in the browser window. Briefly explain any four attributes in the BODY tag.
Answer:

  1. Bgcolor – It is used to set background colour
  2. Background – It is used to set a background picture
  3. Text – it is used to set the foreground colour
  4. Left margin – It is used to set the left margin

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 21.
HTML has the facility to provide External Jinks as well as Internal links.

  1. Which tag is used to include an External link?
  2. How will you construct an Internal link?

Answer:
1. Anchor Tag i.e. <a href=”filename”>

2. Internal link is used to link two places of the same web page
<html>
<head>
<title>
Internal link
</title>
</head>
<body bgcolor=”vbcyan”>
<a name=top href=#bottom>Goto Bottom</a>
<ul type=”circle”>
<li>Form
<li>TextBox
<li>Label
<li>CommandButton
</ul>
<a name=bottom href=#top>Goto top</a>
</body>
</html>

Question 22.
Categorise the following tags in HTML and write the criterian for the categorisation.
<BR>, <P>, <BODY>, <B>, <HR>, <IMG>
Answer:
1. Empty tag:
<BR>
<HR>
<IMG>
2. Container tag
<P>
<BODY>
<B>

Question 23.
Differentiate empty tags and container tag with example.
Answer:
1. Empty tags: It has opening tag only, no closing tag
Eg; <hr>, <br> etc
2. Container tag: It as both opening and closing tag.
Eg: <html> </html>
<body></body>etc.

Question 24.
Write True or False

  1. Text is an attribute of <BODY> tag to insert a text matter in the web page.
  2. <EM> tag functions similar to <l> tag.

Answer:

  1. False
  2. True

Plus Two Computer Science Web Technology Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Write and explain any four text formatting tags in HTML.
Answer:
Text formatting tags are given below.

  1. <B>: This tag is based to make the text Bold Eg: <B> Computer application </B>
  2. <l>: This tag is used to make the text in italics eg: <l> computer aplication</l>
  3. <U>: This tag is used to underline the text eg: <U> computer aplication</U>
  4. <S>: This tag is used for striking out the text eg: <S> computeraplication</S>

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 2.
Match the following.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology img1
Answer:
Correct match as given below

  • <H2> – Heading-Align
  • <MARQUEE> – Scrolling text – Bgcolor
  • <IMG> – Inserting picture-Src

Question 3.
Briefly explain the use of tags <Q>, <PRE> and <ADDRESS> tags.
Answer:

  1. <Q>: It is used to give text within double quotes
  2. <PRE>: This tag is used to display the content as we entered in the text editor.
  3. <ADDRESS>: This tag is used to provide information of the author or owner

Question 4.
Write a HTML code to develop a web page about Kerala state as shown below:
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology img2
The specifications for the page are:

  1. The main heading must be of bigger in size, centralised and bold.
  2. Subheadings must be lesser size than main heading and in italics.
  3. There should be a picture at the center of the page with filename“tree.jpg”.
  4. The background colour of the page must me blue.

Answer:
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<TITLE>Kerala State</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY bgcolor = “blue”>
<center> <H1> kerala state </H1 >
<I><H2> <br> God’s own country </H2></l> </center>
<img src = “tree.jpg” align = “middle”>
<br>
Capital: Thimvanthapuram </BODY>
</HTML>

Question 5.
PHP is a popular scripting language.

  1. Write whether it is client side or server side.
  2. Write a brief note on PHP.

Answer:

  1. Server side
  2. PHP (PHP Hypertext Preprocessor)
    • It is an open-source, general-purpose scripting language.
    • It is a server-side scripting language
    • Introduced by Rasmus Lendorf
    • A PHP file with extension .php
    • It support database programming the default * DBMS is MySQL
    • It is platform-independent
    • PHP interpreter in Linux is LAMP(Linux, Apache, MySQL, PHP)

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 6.
How client side scripting differs from server side scripting?
Answer:
Following are the differences

Client-Side ScriptingServer Side Scripting
Script is copied to client browserTo the webserver.
Executed by the client.Executed by the server and result gets back to the browser window
Used for Client level validationConnect to the database in the server
It is possible to block by the userCannot possible
Client-side scripts depend on the type and version of the browserIt does not depend on the type and version of the browser

Question 7.
Briefly explain the two types of communication on the web.
Answer:
The two types of communication on the web are given below.
1. Client to Web server communication:
This communication is carried out. between client to the webserver (shopping site). The technology used to protect data that are transferred from client to web server is https.

2. Web server to web server communication:
This communication is usually carried out between web sever (seller) to another web server (normally bank). For the safe transaction. Digital certificate issued by third-party web sites are used.

Question 8.
Compare static and dynamic webpages.

Static web pagesDynamic web pages
Content and layout is fixedContent and layout is changed frequently
Never use databaseDatabase is used
Run by browserIt runs on the server and result get back to the client(browser)
Easy to developNot at all easy

Question 9.
Differentiate Empty tag and Container tag.
Answer:
There are two types of tags, opening tag, and closing tag
1. Empty tag: It has only opening tag and no closing tag
Eg: <br>, <hr>,..

2. Container tag: It has both opening and closing tags. This tag contains some text data
Eg:<html>, <head>, <body>,….

Question 10.
Create a webpage using HTML to display the following message.
Answer:
‘The symbol H2O represents water’.
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<TITLE>Subscript</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<Body>
<B>’The symbol H<SUB>2</SUB>O represents water’<B> .
</Body>
</HTML>

Question 11.
While designing a webpage Neena wants to explain the meaning of each step. Can you help her?
Answer:
Neena can use Comments while writing the code. It is a good programming practice. Comments improve readability. It is not the part of a program. Comments <!—and —>
Eg.
<!—This is used to display an information—> <HTML>
<!—head section—>
<HEAD>
<TITLE>Subscript</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<!—BODY section—>
<Body>
<B> The symbol H <SUB>2</SUB>O represents water’</B>
</Body>
</HTML>

Question 12.
Complete the following table.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology img3
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology img4

Question 13.
Give HTML tag to display the sentence “WELCOME TO HTML” as centralized heading, having red colour.
Answer:
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>My page</TITLE></HEAD> <BODY>
<FONTCOLOR=“RED”>
<H1 ALIGN= “CENTER”>WELCOME TO HTML</ H1>
</FONT>
</BODY>
<HTML>

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 14.
Explain the Main attributes of font tag.
Answer:
<FONT>tag defines the font properties of text en-closed
The main attributes are:

  1. Face – This specifies the type of font.
  2. Color – This specifies the colour of the text enclosed
  3. Size – This specifies the font size
    Eg. <FONT Face= “Arial” size = “3” color= “magenta”>

Question 15.
John visited a website, it is found that when clicking on a particular text the browser open a new web page. Name the feature and Identify the tag used for this purpose. Write the HTML code to link to a file name “main.html”.
Answer:

  1. Hyper Linking. By clicking on hypertext we can see or go to other webpages or to other section of same document.
  2. <A> tag is used
  3. <A href=”main.htmr>Main</A>

Question 16.
Antony visited his school website, he could not see the picture of his school instead of that there is a text message “Your browser could not support images”. Why it is happened and write the html code for this.
Answer:
Because the browser he used cannot load the image. He can use Alt attribute of IMG Tag.
<IMG SRC =“D:\school.jpg” Alt-Your browser could not support images”>

Question 17.
Suppose you want to display a picture named school.jpg located in the ‘Photos’ subdirectory of the directory ‘My documents’ of C drive in your web page.

  1. Name the tag used for this purpose.
  2. Write HTML code for the web page.

Answer:
1. <IMG>tag. It is used to display images in webpage.

2. code for the web page.
<HEAD><TITLE>
</HEAD>
<Body>
<IMG SRC= ‘C:/My documents/Photos/School.jpg’></Body>
<html>

Plus Two Computer Science Web Technology Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Explain the main list tags in HTML?
Answer:
HTML provides three basic types of lists- unordered, ordered and definition list.
1. Unordered list:
Unordered list arranges the list items with bullet symbols in front. <UL> and </UL> tag encloses an Unordered list. List items are specified by <LI> tag. The tag <UL> can take values square, circle or disc. The default type is disc.
Eg: <UL>
<LI>COMPUTER
<LI>BIOLOGY
</UL>

2. Ordered list:
In Ordered list, the list items are numbered in sequence. <OL> and </OL> tag encloses an Ordered list. List items are specified by <LI> tag. The tag <OL> can take values as follows

  1. type = 1 for 1,2,3
  2. type = i for i, ii, iii
  3. type = I fori, II, III,….
  4. type = afora,b,c,…
  5. type = AforA,B,C

Eg:<OL>
<LI>COMPUTER
<LI>BIOLOGY
</OL>

3. Definition List:
It is formed by a group of definitions and their descriptions. No bullet symbol or number is provided for the list items. The <DL> and </DL> tags enclose the definition list. The <DT> tag contains the definition term and <DD> tag specifies the description.
Eg: <DL>
<DT>Echeque
<DD>Electronic cheque
</DL>

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 2.
Explain the use of <BODY> tag and list any four of its attributes
Answer:
Web page contents are given int the body section. Attributes of body tag are:
1. BGCOLOR – Specifies background color for the document Body
Eg. <BODY BGCOLOR= “RED”>

2. BACKGROUND – Sets the image as background for the document body
Eg. <BODY BACKGROUNG= “C:\result.jpg”>

3. TEXT – Specifies the color of the text content of the page
Eg. <BODYTEXT= “Red”>

4. LINK – Specifies colour of the hyperlinks that are not visited by the user

5. ALINK – Specifies the colour of hyperlinks

6. VLINK – Specifies the color of hyperlinks which are already visited by the viewer.
Eg. < BODY ALINK= “Cyan” LINK=” Magenta” VLINK= “Orange”>

7. Left margin and Right margin-Sets margin from left and top of the document window.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Students can Download Chapter 1 Relations and Functions Questions and Answers, Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Plus Two Maths Relations and Functions Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Show that the relation R in the set is given by A = {x ∈ Z, 0 = x = 12}
R = {(a,b): a – b is a multiple of 4}
Answer:
Given; R = {(a,b): a – b is a multiple of 4}
Clearly a – a = 0 is a multiple of 4. So
(a, a) ∈ R, hence Reflexive
(a,b) ∈ R ⇒ a  -b is a multiple of 4, imply that b – a is a multiple of 4 ⇒ (b, a) ∈ R So Symmetric.
(a, b), (b, c) ∈ R ⇒ a – b and b – c are multiple of 4.
a – b + b – c is a multiple of 4
a – c is a multiple of 4 ⇒ (a, c) ∈ R So Transitive.
Hence R is an equivalence Relation.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Question 2.
Let R be a Relation in the set A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} defines as R = {(x,y): y = 2x – 1}

  1. Write R in roster form and find it’s domain and range
  2. Is R an equivalence relation ? Justify.

Answer:
1. R ={(1, 1), (2, 3), (3, 5)}
Domain = {1, 2, 3} ; Range ={1, 3, 5}

2. Since (2, 2) ∉ R, R is not reflexive
(2, 3) ∈ R but (3, 2) ∉ R
R is not symmetric.
(2, 3) ∈ R, (3, 5) ∉ R but, (2, 5) ∉ R
R is not transitive
∴ R is not an equivalence relation.

Question 3.
Plus Two Maths Relations and Functions 3 Mark Questions and Answers 1
Answer:
Given;
Plus Two Maths Relations and Functions 3 Mark Questions and Answers 2

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Question 4.
Let ‘ * ’ is a binary operation on the set Q of rational numbers as follows;

  1. a * b = a – b
  2. a * b = a + ab
  3. a * b = a2 + b2
  4. a * b = (a – b)2

Find which of the binary operation are commutative and associative. Also find the identity element if exists.
Answer:
1. Given; a * b = a – b
b * a = b – a ≠ a – b = a * b
Hence not commutative.
Now; a * (b * c) = a * (b – c)
= a – (b – c) – a – b + c
(a * b) * c = (a – b) * c = a – b – c
a * (b * c) ≠ (a * b) * c
Hence not associative.
Now; a * e = a ⇒ a – e = a ⇒ e = 0
e * a = a ⇒ e – a = a ⇒ e = 2a
a * e ≠ e * a.
So identity element does not exist.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

2. Given; a * b = a + ab
b * a = b + ab ≠ a + ab = a * b
Hence not commutative.
Now; a * (b * c) = a * (b + bc)
= a + a(b + be) = a + ab + abc
(a * b) * c = (a + ab) * c
= a + ab + c(a + ab)
= a + ab + ac + abc
a * (b * c) * (a * b) * c
Hence not associative.
Now; a * e = a ⇒ a + ae = a ⇒ e = 0
e * a = a ⇒ e + ea = a ⇒ e = \(\frac{a}{1+a}\)
a * e ≠ e * a.
So identity element does not exist.

3. Given; a * b = a2 + b2
b * a = b2 + a2 = a2 + b2 = a * b
Hence commutative.
Now; a * (b * c) = a* (b2 + c2) = a2 + (b2 + c2)2
(a * b) * c = (a2 + b2) * c
= (a2 + b2)2 + c2
a * (b * c) ≠ (a * b) * c
Hence not associative.
Now; a * e – a ⇒ a2 + e2 = a
⇒ e = \(\sqrt{a-a^{2}}\) ∉ Q
So identity element does not exist.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

4. Given; a * b = (a – b)2
b * a = (b – a)2 = (a – b)2 = a * b
Hence commutative.
Now; a * (b * c) = a * (b – c)2 (a – (b-c)2)2
(a * b) * c – (a – b)2 * c = ((a – b)2 – c)2
a * (b * c) ≠ (a * b) * c
Hence not associative.
Now; a * e = \(\sqrt{a}\) ⇒ e = a – \(\sqrt{a}\) ∉ Q
So identity element does not exist.

Question 5.
Show that the relation R on the set of natural numbers defined as R: { (x, y): y – x is a multiple of 2} is an equivalance relation
Answer:
Since x – x = 0 is multiple of 2, (x, x)∈ R
Therefore reflexive.
If y – x is a multiple of 2 then x – y is also a multiple of 2. Therefore (x, y) ∈ R ⇒ (y, x) ∈ R. Hence symmetric.
If y – x is a multiple of 2 and z-y is a multiple of 2, then their sum y – x + z – y = z – x is a multiple of 2. Therefore (x, y), (y, z) ∈ R ⇒ (x, z) ∈ R
Hence transitive.
Therefore R is an equivalance relation.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Question 6.
Consider f : [3, ∞) → [1, ∞) given by f(x) = x2 – 6x + 10. Find f-1
Answer:
f(x) = (x – 3)2 + 1
y = (x – 3)2 + 1
⇒ (x – 3)2 = y – 1
⇒ x = \(\sqrt{y-1}\) + 3
∴ f-1(x) = \(\sqrt{x-1}\) + 3

Question 7.
‘*’ be a binary operation on N × N defined as (a, b) * (c, d) – (ac, bd)

  1. Show that * is commutative.
  2. Find the identity element of * if any
  3. Write an element of N × N which has an inverse.

Answer:
1. (a, b) * (c, d) = (ac, bd) = (ca, db)
= (c, d) * (a, b)
Hence * is commutative.

2. (a, b) * (e, e) = (a, b)
⇒ (ae, be) = (a, b)
⇒ ae = a ⇒ e = 1
⇒ be = b ⇒ e = 1
Therefore (1,1) is the identity element.

3. Invertible element is (1,1).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Question 8.
Show that the relation R in the set R of Real numbers defined asR = {(a, b): a ≤ b2} is neither reflexive, nor symmetric nor transitive.
Answer:
a ≤ a2 is not true for all a. So (a, a) ∉ R hence not Reflexive.
(a, b) ∈ R ⇒ a ≤ b2 does not imply that b ≤ a2. So (b, a) ∉ R, hence not Symmetric. (a, b),(b, c) ∈ R ⇒ a ≤ b2 and b ≤ c2 does not imply that a ≤ c2. So (a, c) ∉ R, hence not Transitive.

Question 9.
Consider f :R+ → [-5, ∞) given by f(x) = 9x2 + 6x – 5. Show that fis invertible with f-1(y) = \(\frac{\sqrt{y+6}-1}{3}\)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Relations and Functions 3 Mark Questions and Answers 3
f is invertible and f-1(y) = \(\frac{\sqrt{y+6}-1}{3}\).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Question 10.
Let A = R – {3} and B = R – {1} consider the function f: A → B defined by f(x) = \(\frac{x-2}{x-3}\) is f one-one and onto? Justify your answer.
Answer:
Given; f: A → B, A = R – {3} and B = R – {1}
f(x1) = f(x2) ⇒ \(\frac{x_{1}-2}{x_{1}-3}=\frac{x_{2}-2}{x_{2}-3}\)
⇒ (x1 – 2)(x2 – 3) = (x2 – 2)(x1 – 3)
⇒ x1x2 – 2x2 – 3x1 + 6 = x2x1 – 2x1 – 3x2 + 6
⇒ -2x2 – 3x1 = – 2x1 – 3x2 ⇒ x1 = x2
Hence one-one
Let y ∈ B ⇒ f(x) = y ⇒ \(\frac{x-2}{x-3}\) = y
⇒ x – 2 = xy – 3y
⇒ x – xy = 2 – 3y
⇒ x(1 – y) = 2 – 3y ⇒ x = \(\frac{2-3 y}{1-y}\) ∈ A=
Hence onto. Therefore bijective.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Question 11.
Plus Two Maths Relations and Functions 3 Mark Questions and Answers 4
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Relations and Functions 3 Mark Questions and Answers 5
Plus Two Maths Relations and Functions 3 Mark Questions and Answers 6

Plus Two Maths Relations and Functions Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The relation R defined in the set A = {-1, 0, 1} as R = {(a,b):a = b2}

  1. Check whether R is reflexive, symmetric and transitive.
  2. Is R an equivalence relation

Answer:
1. (-1, -1) ∉ R, R is not reflexive
(-1,1) ∈ R but (1, -1) ∉ R, R is not symmetric
(-1,1) ∈ R, (1, 1) ∈ R and (-1, 1) ∈ R,
R is transitive.

2. R is not reflexive, not symmetric and not transitive. So R is not an equivalence relation.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Question 2.
Let A = {1, 2, 3}. Give an example of a relation on A which is

  1. Symmetric but neither reflexive nor transitive.
  2. Transitive but neither reflexive nor symmetric.

Answer:
1. R = {(1, 2),(2, 1)}
(1, 1) ∉ R ⇒ R is not reflexive
(1, 2) ∈ R ⇒ (2, 1) ∈ R, R is symmetric
(1, 2) ∈ R, (2, 1) ∈ R but (1,1) ∉ R,
R is not transitive

2. R = {(1, 2),(1, 3),(2, 3)}
(1, 1) ∉ R ⇒ R is not reflexive
(1, 2) ∈ R ⇒ but (2,1) ∉ R, R is not symmetric
(1, 2) ∈ R, (2, 3) ∈R ⇒ (1, 3) ∈ R,
R is transitive.

Question 3.
Find fog and gof if

  1. f(x) – |x| and g(x) – |3x + 4|
  2. f(x) = 16x4 and g(x) = x \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Answer:
1. Given; f(x) = |x| and g(x) = |3x + 4|
fog(x) = f(g(x))
= f(|3x + 4|) = ||3x + 4|| = |3x + 4|
gof(x) = g(f(x)) = g(|x|) = |3|x| + 4|

2. fog(x) = f(g(x)) = g(x\(\frac{1}{4}\)) = 16(x\(\frac{1}{4}\))4 = x
gof (x) = g(f(x)) = g(16x4) = (16x4)\(\frac{1}{4}\) = 4x.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Question 4.
Consider the binary operation* : Q → Q where Q is the set of rational numbers is defined as a * b = a + b – ab

  1. Find 2 * 3 (1)
  2. Is identity for * exist? If yes, find the identity element. (2)
  3. Are elements of Q invertible? Is yes, find the inverse of an element in Q (1)

Answer:
1. 2 * 3 = 2 + 3 – 6 = -1.

2. a * e = a ⇒ a + e – ae = a
⇒ e(1 – a) – 0 ⇒ e = 0
e * a = a ⇒ e + a – ea = a
⇒ e(1 – a) = 0 ⇒ e = 0 is the identity element.

3. a * b = 0 ⇒ a + b – ab = 0 ⇒ b = \(\frac{a}{a-1}\)

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Question 5.
‘*’ is a binary operation on R defined as a * b = 2ab

  1. Determine whether * is commutative and associative
  2. Find the identity element if exists.
  3. Find the inverse element, if exists

Answer:
1. a * b = 2ab = 2ba = b * a
Therefore commutative
a * (b * c) = a * (2bc) = 4abc
(a * b) * c = (2ab) * c = 4 abc
Therefore is associative.

2. a * e = a ⇒ 2ae = a ⇒ e = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
e * a = a ⇒ 2ea = a ⇒ e = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Therefore identity element is \(\frac{1}{2}\).

3. a * b = \(\frac{1}{2}\) ⇒ 2ab = \(\frac{1}{2}\) ⇒ b = \(\frac{1}{4a}\), a ≠ 0.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Question 6.

  1. If f: R – {2} → R – {2}, defined by f(x) = \(\frac{2 x-3}{x-2}\) then find fof
  2. Which of the following satisfies the condition f-1 ≠ f.

(a) f : R – {0} → R – {0}, f(x) = \(\frac{1}{x}\)
(b) f :R → R, f(x) = -x
(c) f : R – {-1} → R – {-1}, f(x) = \(\frac{x}{x+1}\)
(d) f: R – {2} → R – {2}, f(x) = \(\frac{2 x-3}{x-2}\)

Answer:
1. fof(x) = f(f(x)) = f\(\left(\frac{2 x-3}{x-2}\right)\)
Plus Two Maths Relations and Functions 4 Mark Questions and Answers 7

2. Following satisfies the condition f-1 ≠ f:
(a) f : R – {0} → R – {0}, f(x) = \(\frac{1}{x}\)
(b) f :R → R, f(x) = -x
The graph of functions in (a) and (b) symmetric with respect to the line y = x. The function in (d) we have already shown that fof (x) = x. So the answer is (c)
f : R – {-1} → R – {-1}, f(x) = \(\frac{x}{x+1}\).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Question 7.
If f :R → R is a function defined by f(x) = 3x – 2

  1. Show that f is one-one.
  2. Find fof(x).
  3. Find the inverse of f if exists.

Answer:
1. f(x1) = f(x2)
⇒ 2x1 – 3 = 2x2 – 3 ⇒ x1 = x2
Therefore one-one.

2. fof(x) = f(f(x)) = f(3x – 2)
f (x) = 3(3x – 2) – 2 = 9x – 6 – 2 = 9x – 8.

3. Let g(x) = \(\frac{x+2}{3}\)
fog(x) = f(g(x))
= f\(\left(\frac{x+2}{3}\right)\) = 3\(\left(\frac{x+2}{3}\right)\) – 2 = x
Similarly we can show that
gof(x) = g(f(x)) = x
Therefore; f-1 = \(\frac{x+2}{3}\).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Question 8.
Let A = N × N and be the binary operation. On A defined by (a, b) * (c, d) = (a+c, b+d). Show that ‘ * ’ is commutative and associative. Find the identity for ‘ * ’ on A if any.
Answer:
Given; A = N × N and
(a, b) * (c, d) = (a + c, b + d)
(c, d) * (a, b) = (c + a, d + b)
= (a + c, b + d) = (a, b) * (c, d))
Hence commutative.
Now; (a, b) * [(c, d) * (e, f)] = (a, b) * [c + e, d+f]
= (a + c + e, b + d + f)
[(a, b) * (c, d)] * (e, f) = [a + c, b + d] * (e, f)
= (a + c + e, b + d + f)
Hence associative.
(a, b) * (e, e) = (a, b) ⇒ (a + e, b + e) = (a, b)
⇒ a + e = a, b + e = b ⇒ e=0, e = 0 ⇒ (0,0) ∉ A
So identity element does not exist.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Question 9.
If f(x) = \(\left(\frac{4x+3}{6x-4}\right)\), x ≠ \(\frac{2}{3}\)

  1. Show that fof{x)=x, for all x ≠ \(\frac{2}{3}\).
  2. What is the inverse of ‘f?

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Maths Relations and Functions 4 Mark Questions and Answers 10
2. Since; fof(x) = x
f is the inverse of it self.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Question 10.
1. Let f be a function defined by f(x) = \(\sqrt{x}\) is a function if it defined from (1)
(a) f : N → N
(b) f : R → R
(c) f : R → R+
(d) f : R+ → R+
2. Check the injectivity and surjectivity of the following functions (3)
(a) f : N → N defined by f(x) = x3
(b) f : R → R given by f(x) = [x]
Answer:
1.
(d) f : R+ → R+

2.
(a) For x, y ∈ N,
f(x) = f(y) ⇒ x3 = y3 ⇒ x = y
Therefore, f is injective
For 2 ∈ N, there does not exist x in the domain N such that f(x) = x3 = 2.
∴ f is not surjective.

(b) f : R → R given by f(x) = [x]
It seen that f(1.1) = 1 and f(1.8) = 1;
But 1.1 ≠ 1.8;
∴ f is not injective
There does not exist any element x ∈ R
such that f(x) = 0.7
∴ f is not surjective.

Plus Two Maths Relations and Functions Six Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Consider the function f(x) \(=\frac{x+1}{x-1}\); x ≠ 1
1. fof(2) = ____
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4
2. What is the inverse of f?
3. f(3) + f-1(3)
Answer:
1. fof(2):
(b) 2
Plus Two Maths Relations and Functions 6 Mark Questions and Answers 11

2. Let g : range of f → R- {1} inverse of f Let ‘y be any arbitrary element in the range of f
then y = f(x) = \(\frac{x+1}{x-1}\)
⇒ xy – y = x + 1 ⇒ x(y – 1) = y +1
Plus Two Maths Relations and Functions 6 Mark Questions and Answers 12
Let us defi ne g : range of f → R- {1} as
Plus Two Maths Relations and Functions 6 Mark Questions and Answers 13

3. f(3) = 2, f-1(3) = 2
f(3) + f-1(3) = 2 + 2 = 4.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Question 2.
1. Show that the function f: R → R defined by f(x) = 2x – 3 is one-one and onto. Find f-1
2. Which of the following figure represents the graph of a function on R which is onto but not one-one.
Plus Two Maths Relations and Functions 6 Mark Questions and Answers 14
Plus Two Maths Relations and Functions 6 Mark Questions and Answers 15
3. Write a function on R which is onto but not one-one
Answer:
1. f(x) = 2x – 3
f(x1) = f(x2)
⇒ 2x1 – 3 = 2x2 – 3 ⇒ x1 = x2
Therefore f is one-one.
Let f(x) = yeR, then
y = 2x – 3 ⇒ 2x = y + 3 ⇒ x = \(\frac{y+3}{2}\) ∈ R
Therefore f is onto. Then f-1(x) = \(\frac{x+3}{2}\).

2. Option (c)
[(b),(c),(d) are not one-one since for different values of x, we have same value of y. ie; horizontal line meets at more than one point, (b) and (d) are not onto since range and codomain are different].

3. f(x) = x2, f : R → [0, ∞) (Any other function).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Question 3.
A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 6}, * is a binary operation on A is defined as a * b = HCF of a and b.

  1. Represent * with the help of an operation table.
  2. Find the identity element.
  3. Write a commutative binary operation on A with 3 as the identity element. (Hint: Operation table may be used.

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Maths Relations and Functions 6 Mark Questions and Answers 16

2. From the table it is clear that the identity element is 6.

3. We can write any operation table which is commutative with 3 as the identity element.
Plus Two Maths Relations and Functions 6 Mark Questions and Answers 17

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Question 4.
Let * be a binary operation on the set of all real numbers R defined by a * b = a + b + a2b for a, b R.

  1. Find 2 * 6 and 6 * 2. (2)
  2. Prove that * is neither commutative nor associative. (2)
  3. Find the identity elements in R if exists. (2)

Answer:
1. a * b = a + b + a2b
2 * 6 = 2 + 6 + 22 × 6 = 8 + 24 = 32
6 * 2 = 6 + 2 + 62 × 2 = 8 + 72 = 80.

2. a * b = a + b + a2b a * b ≠ b * a
b * a = b + a + b2a
∴ is not commutative.
(ab)c = (a + b + a2b) c
= a + b + a2b + c + (a + b + a2b)2c
a * (b * c) = a * (b + c + b2c)
= a + b + c + b2c + a2(b + c + b2c)
∴ is not associative.

3. Let e is the identity element.
∴ a * e = a ⇒ a + e + a2e = a ⇒ e(1 + a2) = 0
∴ e = 0
∴ e * a = a ⇒ e + a + e2a = a ⇒ e + e2a = 0
⇒ e(1 + ae) = 0
⇒ e = 0; (1 + ae) = 0
ea = -1 ⇒ e = – \(\frac{1}{a}\)
Identity element does not exists.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Question 5.

  1. Consider f: {3, 4, 5, 6} → {8, 10, 12, 13, 14} And f = { (3, 8), (4, 10), (5, 12), (6, 14)}. State whether f has inverse ? Give reason. (2)
  2. Consider f : R → R given by f(x) = 3x + 2 Show that f is invertible. Find the inverse of f

Answer:
1. Distinct elements in set {3, 4, 5, 6} has distinct images, under f.
∴ f is one- one
But 14 in the codomain has no pre image.
∴ f is not onto.
∴ f has no inverse.

2. f(x) = 3x + 2; then
f(x1) = f(x2) = 3x2 + 2 ⇒ x1= x2
Hence F is one – one
For y ∈ R, let y = 3x + 2 ⇒ x = \(\frac{y-2}{3}\) ∈ R
Plus Two Maths Relations and Functions 6 Mark Questions and Answers 18

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry

Students can Download Chapter 3 Electrochemistry Questions and Answers, Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry

Plus Two Chemistry Electrochemistry One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The metal which acts as the anode in Daniell cell is _______
Answer:
Zinc

Question 2.
Electrolysis of dilute H2SO4 liberates ________ gas at cathode.
Answer:
Hydrogen

Question 3.
The charge required to reduce 1 mole of I2 to I is
(a) 96500 C
(b) 2 × 96500 C
(c) \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 96500 C
(d) 4 × 96500 C
Answer:
(b) 2 × 96500 C

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry

Question 4.
Of the following metals that cannot be obtained by electrolysis of the aqueous solution of their salts are
(a) Ag and Mg
(b) Ag and Al
(c) Mg and Al
(d) Cu and Cr
Answer:
(c) Mg and Al

Question 5.
Chemically, rust is _______
Answer:
Hydrated ferric oxide (Fe2O3.xH2O)

Question 6.
One of your friends argues that in the laboratory CuS04 is not stored in Aluminium bottles.

  1. Do you agree?
  2. Justify.

Answer:
1. Yes.

2. Aluminium displaces copper from copper sulphate solution. Because, in electrochemical series Al stands before copper. The reduction potential of Cu is greater than that of Al. Greater the value of reduction potential, more easily is the substance reduced.
(Al+3/Al) = – 1.66 V,
(Cu+2/Cu)= + 0.34V

Question 7.
Arrange the following metals in the order in which they displace each other from the solution of their salts:
Al, Cu, Fe, Mg and Zn
Answer:
The correct order is Mg, Al, Zn, Fe, Cu

Question 8.
The conductivity of 0.20 M solution of KCl at 298 K is 0.0248 S cm-1. Calculate the molar conductivity.
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry one mark q8 img 1

Question 9.
The limiting molar conductivity of HCl, CH3COONa and NaCl are respectively 425, 90 and 125 mho cm2mol-1 at 25°C. The molar conductivity of 0.01 m. CH3COOH solution is 7.5 mho cm2 mol-1 at the same temperature. The degree of dissociation of 0.1 as acetic acid solution at the same temperature is _________
Answer:
0.02

Question 10.
The ion of least limiting molar conductivity among the following is
(a) SO2-4
(b) H+
(c) Ca2+
(d) CH3COO
Answer:
(d) CH3COO

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry

Question 11.
Standard electrode potential of three metals XY and Z are 0.52V, 2.87 V and -0.44 V respectively. The reducing power of these metals are
Answer:
Y > Z > X

Question 12.
A current of strength of 9.65 ampere is passed through excess fused AlCl3 for 5 hours. How many liters of chlorine will be liberated at STP.
Answer:
20.16

Question 13.
Consider the following four electrodes
P = Cu2+(.0001 M/Cu(s) Q = Cu2+(0.1 M)/Cu(s)
R = Cu2+(0.01 M)/Cu(s) S = Cu2+(0.001 M)Cu(s)
If the standard reduction potential of Cu2+/Cu is +.34V the reduction potential in volts of the above electrode follows the order.
Answer:
Q > R > P

Plus Two Chemistry Electrochemistry Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Resistance of lead is greater than that of gold.

  1. Do you agree?
  2. What do you mean by resistance?
  3. What do you mean by resistivity?

Answer:

  1. Yes.
  2. Resistance is the hindrance offered by a substance to the flow of electricity through it.
  3. Resistivity is the resistance of a conductor of length 1 cm and area of cross section 1 cm2.

R ∝ \(\frac{\ell}{\mathrm{A}}\) Or R = ρ\(\frac{\ell}{\mathrm{A}}\) where R → Resistance
and ρ → resistivity.
When l = 1 cm and A = 1 cm2
then, R = ?

Question 2.
In the chemistry lab, a student immersed two platinum electrodes in a solution of CuSO4 and electric current was passed through the solution. After sometime he noticed that the colour of CuSO4 disappeares with the evolution of a gas at the electrode. In his Practical Log, he recorded that the colourless solution contains H2SO4.

  1. Is it true?
  2. Comment on his findings and justify your answer.

Answer:
1. Yes.

2. When aqueous CuSO4 solution is electrolysed using Pt electrodes, Cu is deposited at the cathode and O2 is liberated at the anode.
CuSO4(aq) → Cu2+(aq) + SO42-(aq)
Cu2+(aq) + 2\(\bar { e }\) → Cu(s) (at cathode)
H2O(l) → 2H+(aq) + 1/2 O2(g) + 2\(\bar { e }\) (at anode)
Thus, H2SO4 is formed as the secondary product.

Question 3.
Consider the argument, “On the basis of position in the electrochemical series, Al does not displace hydrogen from water and acids

  1. Do you agree with the argument?
  2. Substantiate your answer.

Answer:

  1. No.
  2. Metals which are above hydrogen in the electro chemical series can displace H2 from acids, i.e., elements having lower reduction potential than hydrogen, can liberate H2 from acids and water. Al displaces hydrogen from water and acids.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry

Question 4.
How much electricity in Faraday is required to produce

  1. 20.0 g of Ca from molten CaCl2?
  2. 45.0 g of Al from molten Al2O3?

(Hint: Atomic masses – Ca: 40 u, Al: 27 u)
Answer:
1. The electrode reaction is Ca2+(aq) + 2e → Ca(s)
Electricity required to produce 40 g Ca = 2 F
Electricity required to produce 20 g Ca = 1 F

2. The electrode reaction is.
Al3+(aq) + 3e → Al(s)
Electricity required to produce 27 g of Al = 3 F
Electricity required to produce 45 g Al = 5 F

Question 5.
In a debate, a student said “Electrolytes dissolved in water dissociate into constituent ions”. His friend supported this statement and said “The degree of dissociation of an electrolyte increase with the increasing concentration of the electrolyte.”

  1. Do you agree with these statements?
  2. If you agree or not, give the reason.

Answer:

  1. The first statement is correct, but the second statement is wrong.
  2. Degree of dissociation of an electrolyte increases with dilution and not by increasing the concentration.

Question 6.
The standard electrode potential of the elements A, B and C are 0.68, – 2.50 and – 0.50 volts respectively.

  1. Arrange them in the order of their reducing power.
  2. Justify your answer.

Answer:

  1. B < C < A
  2. Greater the value of reduction potential, greater will be the reducing power.

Question 7.
In a standard hydrogen electrode, is it possible to replace the Platinum wire in the glass tube with Aluminium wire? Justify your answer.
Answer:
No. Platinum is an inert electrode and moreover the coefficient of cubical expansion of platinum is equal to that of glass. But, aluminium being an active metal will interfere in the cell reaction.

Question 8.
Listen to the following statements.
“Zinc displaces silver from AgNO3 solution, because standard oxidation potential of zinc is greaterthan that of silver”.

  1. Is it true?
  2. What happens when we use copper instead of zinc?
  3. Justify your answer.

Answer:

  1. Yes.
  2. Copper also displaces Ag from AgNO3 solution.
  3. In electrochemical series, Cu lies above Ag. The reduction potential of copper is +0.34 V. But in the case of silver, the reduction potential is +0.80 V.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry

Question 9.
“Metal having -ve reduction potential when dipped in the solution of its own ion has a tendency to go into the solution”.

  1. Analyse the above statement.
  2. Compare the reduction potential of H+ ion with that of other metal ions.

Answer:

  1. The statement is correct.
  2. The reduction electrode potentials of elements lying above hydrogen in the electrochemical series are negative while those of elements lying below hydrogen are positive. The standard potential for the reaction 2H+ + 2e → H2(g) is taken as 0.00 V.

Question 10.
Consider the statement ‘Specific conductance increases on dilution’.

  1. Is it true?
  2. What is your opinion about it? Justify.
  3. Define specific conductance and give its equation.

Answer:

  1. No.
  2. This is because, the number of ions per unit volume that carry the current in a solution decreases on dilution.
  3. Specific conductance/Conductivity of a conductor is the conductance offered by the conductor of unit length and unit area of cross section.

k = \(\frac{l}{R A}=\frac{1}{R} \times \frac{l}{A}\) where \(\frac{l}{A}\) is the cell constant.

Question 11.
Write Nernst equation and calculate the emf of the following cell at 298 K.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry two mark q11 img 2
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry two mark q11 img 3

Question 12.
The resistance of a conductivity cell containing 0.001 M KCl solution at 298 K is 1500 Ω. What is the cell constant if conductivity of 0.001 M KCl solution at 298 K is 0.146 × 10-3 S cm-1?
Answer:
Cell constant = \(\frac{\text { Conductivity }}{\text { Conductance }}\)
i.e., Cell constant = Conductivity × Resistance
= 0.146 × 10-3 S cm-1 × 1500 Ω
= 0.219 cm-1

Question 13.

  1. Give the name for the iron coated with the Zinc.
  2. Can we store Cl2 gas in copper vessel? Give reason.
    (E°(Cu2+/ Cu) = + 0.34 V E°(Cl2/Cl) = +1 -36 V)(2)
  3. The equilibrium constant of a reaction which is difficult to calculate can be calculated by knowing the standard potential of the cell in which reaction takes place. Give the mathematical expression relating equilibrium constant and cell potential (2)

Answer:

  1. Galvanised iron
  2. No. Since the reduction potential of chlorine is greater than that of copper, chlorine reacts with copper to form cuprous chloride. E°(Cl2/Cl) > (E°(Cu2+/ Cu))
  3. cell = \(\frac{2.303 \mathrm{RT}}{\mathrm{nF}} \log \mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{c}}\)

where E°cell is the standard cell potential (E°cell = E°cathode – E°anode and Kc is the equilibrium constant of the cell reaction.

Plus Two Chemistry Electrochemistry Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Corrosion causes huge loss of metals.

  1. Can you suggest two examples of corrosion from everyday life?
  2. Suggest any two factors which enhance the rate of corrosion.
  3. What is the chemical name of rust?

Answer:

  1. Rusting of iron, Tarnishing of silver
  2. two factors which enhance the rate of corrosion.
    • Presence of impurities
    • Air and moisture
  3. Hydrated ferric oxide (Fe2O3.xH2O)

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry

Question 2.
Write a note on primary cells, secondary cells and fuel cells.
Answer:

Primary cellSecondary cell
Electrode reaction cannot be reversed.Electrode reaction can be reversed by an external electric energy source.
Reaction occurs only once & after use they become dead; not chargeable.Reaction can occur many times in both directions; Rechargeable
Can’t be reusedCan be reused
Cannot be rechargedCan be recharged

Question 3.
Various factors influence the conductance of solutions.

  1. What do you mean by conductance?
  2. Write its formula.
  3. Write the factors influencing it.

Answer:
1. It is also defined as the reciprocal of resistance. It is denoted by C.

2. Conductance, C = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}}\)
But, R = ρ\(\frac{l}{A}\)
∴ C = \(\frac{1}{\rho} \frac{\mathrm{A}}{\ell}\)

3. The factors influencing it.

  • The nature of the electrolyte added.
  • Nature of solvent and its viscosity.
  • Concentration of the solution.
  • Temperature.

Question 4.
The position of some metals in the electrochemical
series in the decreasing order of electropositive
character is given:
Mg > Al > Zn > Cu > Ag

  1. What would happen if a copper spoon is used to stir a solution of aluminium?
  2. Is there any reaction?
  3. Comment on your response and justify.

Answer:

  1. Nothing will happen. The Al solution can be safely stirred using a Cu spoon.
  2. No.
  3. The Cu spoon will not react with the solution of Al. Greater the value of reduction potential of a metal, more easily it is reduced. The element having low reduction potential is more reactive and is oxidised. Cu has greater reduction potential than Al and is more active metal than Cu.

Question 5.
In the lab a student added a zinc piece to CuSO4 solution,

  1. What may be his observation?
  2. What did that observation indicate?
  3. Give reason for the above observation.

[Hint: Process related to electrolysis]
Answer:

  1. Zinc pieces will dissolve in CuSO4 solution and the intensity of the blue colour of CuSO4 solution decreases.
  2. Zinc displaces copper from copper sulphate solution.
  3. Lower the value of reduction potential more easily is the substance oxidised and greater the value of reduction potential, more easily is the substance reduced. Zinc is more reactive. Hence Zinc displaces copper from copper sulphate solution.

Question 6.
Observe the given figure.

  1. Identify the process.
  2. Identify A and B.
  3. Illustrate the mechanism of this process.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry three mark q6 img 4

Answer:

  1. Electrolysis.
  2. A: Anode B: Cathode
  3. During electrolysis, initially the electrolyte gets ionised. On passing electricity, the ions migrate to oppositely charged electrodes. Cations move towards cathode and anions move towards anode. Cations gain electrons from cathode while anions give out electrons to anode during discharge. The movement of ions in solution is responsible for conduction of electricity.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry

Question 7.
In the Chemistry lab the teacher told the students to label some electrolytes suitably. The labelling given by one student is as given:
Strong electrolyte – H2SO4, NH4OH, KOH, Ca(OH)2
Weak electrolytes – NaOH, HCN, NaCl, HCl

  1. Is it correct? Justify.
  2. Correct it.
  3. What do you mean by electrolysis?

Answer:

  1. No.
  2. Strong electrolytes – H2SO4, KOH, HCl, NaOH, NaCl
    Weak electrolytes – NH4OH, HCN, Ca(OH)2
  3. The process of chemical decomposition of electrolyte by the passage of electricity through its molten or dissolved state is called electrolysis.

Question 8.
This figure shows the corrosion of iron.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry three mark q8 img 5

  1. What happens to a metal during corrosion – oxidation or reduction?
  2. Explain the electrochemical theory of rusting of iron.
  3. Write two examples for metals which undergo corrosion.

Answer:
1. Oxidation.

2. The impure surface of iron behaves like as electrochemical cell. Pure iron functions as the anode while the impure surface acts as cathode. The electrolyte is moisture containing dissolved O2 or CO2.
At anode: 2Fe(s) → 2Fe2+(aq) + 4e
At cathode: 4H+(eq) + O2(g) + 4e → 2H2O(l)
The overall reaction is
2Fe(s) + O2(g) + 4H+(aq) → 2Fe2+(aq) + 2H2O(l)
Ferrous ions so formed are oxidised by atmospheric oxygen to ferric ions. The rust formed is chemically hydrated ferric oxide (Fe2O3.xH2O)

2Fe2+(aq) + 2H2O + 1/2 O2 → Fe2O3 + 4H+
Fe2O3 + xH2O → Fe2O3.xH2O (rust)

3. Iron and Copper.

Question 9.
In an experimental set-up for the measurement of potential of a half-cell using the reference electrode and a salt bridge, the salt bridge was suddenly removed.

  1. What happens to the voltage when the salt bridge is removed?
  2. Justify your answer.
  3. Write any two examples of inert electrolytes used for the construction of salt bridge.

Answer:

  1. Voltage ceases.
  2. When the salt bridge is removed the migration of ions between the half cells is hindered which results in the accumulation of charge near the electrodes. This decreases the cell voltage.
  3. KCl, NH4NO3

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry

Question 10.
In the class, teacher wrote some ions on the black board. It is given below.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry three mark q10 img 6

  1. Which among the ions, gain electron more easily?
  2. Is it true that the reduction potential of hydrogen is less than that of Na and Mg?
  3. Justify your answer.

Answer:

  1. Mg2+
  2. No. The reduction potential of hydrogen is greater than that of both Na and Mg.
  3. In electrochemical series, sodium and magnesium lie above hydrogen. Standard reduction potential of hydrogen electrode is taken as zero volt.

Question 11.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry three mark q11 img 7

  1. What does this figure represent?
  2. What is its potential?
  3. How can we construct this?

Answer:

  1. SHE (Standard Hydrogen Electrode) Or NHE (Normal Hydrogen Electrode).
  2. Its potential is taken as zero.
  3. It consists of a platinum wire sealed into a glass tube carrying a platinum foil, coated with finely divided Pt, at one end. The electrode is dipped in an aqueous acid solution of 1M concentration. Pure hydrogen gas at 1 bar pressure is bubbled through the solution at 298 K.

Question 12.
Given the standard electrode potential values
(Al3+/Al) = -1 -66 v E°(Zn2+/Zn) = -0.764 V.

  1. Draw a neat diagram of galvanic cell using the above electrodes and write the cell reaction.
  2. Calculate the emf of the above cell.

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry three mark q12 img 8

2. Cell emf, Ecell = E°(Zn2+/Zn) – E°(Al3+/Al)
= – 0.764 – (-1.66) = + 0.896 V

Question 13.
Depict the galvanic cell in which the reaction Zn(s) + 2Ag+(aq) → Zn2+ + 2Ag(s) takes place. Further show:

  1. Which of the electrodes is negatively charged?
  2. The carriers of current in the cell.
  3. Individual reaction at each electrode.

Answer:
The electrochemical cell which will involve the given cell reaction is depicted as Zn(s) | Zn2+(aq) || Ag+(aq) | Ag(s)

  1. In this cell, the electrode Zn(s) | Zn2+(aq) will act as negative terminal and Ag | Ag+(aq) electrode will act as positive terminal.
  2. The conventional current will flow from silver to zinc electrode in the external circuit.
  3. Individual reaction at each electrode.
    • Cathodic reaction: 2Ag+(aq) + 2e → 2Ag(s)
    • Anodic reaction: Zn(s) → Zn2+(aq) + 2e

Question 14.
How much electricity in terms of Faraday is required to produce

  1. 20.0 g of Ca from molten CaCl2?
  2. 40.0 g of Al from molten Al2O3?

Answer:
1. The electrode reaction is
Ca2++ 2e → Ca
Electricity required to produce 40 g of Ca = 2 F
Electricity required to produce 20 g of Ca = 1 F

2. The electrode reaction is Al3+ + 3e → Al
Electricity required to produce 27 g of Al = 3 F
Electricity required to produce 40 g of Al = \(\frac{3 \mathrm{F} \times 40}{27}\) = 4.44 F

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry

Question 15.
We can calculate the molar conductivity of NH4OH at infinite dilution if Λ° of Ba(OH)2, BaCl2 and NH4Cl are known.

  1. Can you agree with this statement? Explain the law behind it.
  2. Give the equation for Λ° of NH4OH from the above data.

Answer:
1. Yes. According to Kohlrausch’s law the molar conductivity of an electrolyte at infinite dilution is equal to the sum of the molar ionic conductivities of the cations and anions at infinite dilution.

2. Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry three mark q15 img 9

Question 16.

  1. Represent the cell in which the following reaction takes place.
    Mg(s) + 2Ag2+(0.0001M) → Mg2+(0.130M) + 2 Ag(s). Calculate its Ecell if E°cell = + 3.17 V.
  2. Discuss the variation of molar conductivity with concentration for acetic acid and KCI.

Answer:
1. Mg(s) | Mg2+(0.130M) || Ag+(0.0001M) | Ag(s)

2. Conductivity decreases with dilution because the number of ions per unit volume that carry the current in a solution decreases on dilution. For strong electrolytes molar conductivity increases steadily with increase in dilution due to decrease in interionic attraction. For weak electrolytes molar conductivity increases with dilution due to increase in degree of dissociation.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry three mark q16 img 10

Question 17.

  1. Write the relation between molar conductance and molarity of an electrolyte solution.
  2. λm of NaCl, HCl and CH3COONa are 126.4, 425.9 and 91 S cm2 mol-1 respectively. Calculate the λm of acetic acid.

Answer:
1. Λm = \(\frac{1000 \mathrm{k}}{\mathrm{M}}\)

2. Λ°CH3COOH = Λ°CH3COONa + Λ°HCl – Λ°NaCl
= 91 + 425.9 – 126.4
= 390.5 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1

Question 18.
Certain cells are given below.

  1. Classify them into primary, secondary and fuel cells. (Mercury cell, Nickel-Cadmium cell, Lead storage battery, H2- O2 cell, Dry cell)
  2. Represent the cell in which the overall reaction is,
    Cd + 2Ag+ → Cd2+ + 2Ag

Answer:
1. Primary cells: Mercury cell, Dry cell
Secondary cells: Nickel-Cadmium cell, Lead storage battery.
Fuel cell : H2 – O2 cell

2. Cd → Cd2+ + 2e (Oxidation half cell)
2Ag+ + 2e → 2Ag (Reduction half cell)
Therefore the cell is represented as Cd | Cd2+ || Ag+ | Ag

Plus Two Chemistry Electrochemistry Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Every conductivity cell has a definite value for its cell constant.

  1. What is cell constant?
  2. How is it related with specific conductance?
  3. Calculate the cell constant of a conductivity cell containing 0.05M KCl solution, whose resistance is 100 ohm and conductivity is 0.0075 ohm-1 cm-1.

Answer:
1. The quantity \(\ell / \mathrm{A}\) is called cell constant.
A = Area of cross section of the electrodes.
\(\ell\) = distance of separation of two electrodes.

2. Specific conductance = Cell constant × Conductance

3. Cell constant = Specific conductance × Resistance
= 0.0075 ohm 1 cm-1 × 100 ohm = 0.75 cm-1

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry

Question 2.

  1. Explain the working of a H2 – O2 fuel cell.
  2. What are the advantages of fuel cells over other cells?

Answer:
1. In H2 – O2 fuel cell, hydrogen and oxygen are bubbled through porous carbon electrodes into concentrated aqueous NaOH solution, which acts as the electrolyte. The electrode reactions are,
Anode: 2H2(g) + 4 OH(aq) → 4 H2O(l) + 4 \(\bar { e }\)
Cathode: O2(g) + 2 H2O(l) + 4 \(\bar { e }\) → 4 OH(aq)
Overall reaction: 2H2(g) + O2(g) → 2 H2O(l)

2. The advantages of fuel cells over other cells

  • They are pollution free.
  • More efficient than conventional methods.
  • Runs continuously as long as the reactants are supplied.
  • Electrodes are not affected.

Question 3.
Consider the equation, λmHCl = λmH+ + λmCl

  1. Is the above equation correct?
  2. Explain the law.
  3. Write the application of this law.

Answer:
1. The above equation is correct.

2. Kohlrausch’s law. Molar conductance at infinite dilution of an electrolyte is the sum of the molar ionic conductivities at infinite dilution of the cations and anions present in the solution.

3. The application of this law:

  • To find the molar conductivity at infinite dilution (Λ°m) of weak electrolytes.
  • To find the degree of dissociation (α) of weak electrolytes.
    α = \(\frac{\Lambda_{m}}{\Lambda_{m}^{0}}\)
  • To determine the dissociation constant of weak electrolytes.
    Ka = \(\frac{\mathrm{c}_{\alpha}^{2}}{1-\alpha}\)

Question 4.
1. Depict the galvanic cell in which the reaction Zn(s) + 2Ag+(aq) → Zn2+(aq) + 2Ag(s) takes place.
2. Further show

  • Which of the electrodes is negatively charged?
  • The carriers of current in the cell.
  • Individual reaction at each electrode.

Answer:
1. Zn(s) | Zn2+(aq) || Ag+(aq) | Ag(s)

2. Further show

  • Zn electrode is negatively charged (Anode).
  • Ions
  • Individual reaction at each electrode.
    • At anode : Zn(s) → Zn2+(aq) + 2e
    • At cathode : 2Ag+(aq) + 2e → 2Ag(s)

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry

Question 5.

  1. It is not possible to determine the molar conductivity of weak electrolytes at infinite dilution graphically. Do you agree with this? Justify your answer.
  2. Calculate the molar conductivity of NH4OH at infinite dilution if molar conductivity at infinite dilution of Ba(OH)2, BaCl2, and NH4Cl are 523.4, 280 and 130 ohm-1 cm2 mol-1 respectively.

Answer:
1. Yes. I agree with this statement because for weak electrolytes such as acetic acid, molar conductivity increases rapidly with dilution.
Hence, the plot of Λm against \(\sqrt{\mathrm{C}}\) (C = concentration of electrolyte) is not linear. Therefore the value of Λ°m for weak electrolytes cannot be obtained by extraploting the graph.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry four mark q5 img 11

Question 6.
Standard reduction potentials of some elements are given below.
Al = – 1.66 V, Cd = – 0.40 V, Ag = + 0.80 V & Au = + 1.36 V

  1. Which of these can displace hydrogen from hydrochloric acid. Why?
  2. Construct a galvanic cell using any two electrodes. Write the cell reaction and calculate the standard emf.

Answer:
1. Al and Cd can displace hydrogen from HCl. Metals with low reduction potential than H (i.e., with -ve value) can liberate H2 from acids.

2.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry four mark q6 img 12

Question 7.
Molar conductance at infinite dilution of acetic acid cannot be determined experimentally.

  1. How can it be determined?
  2. State the law.
  3. Give two sets of electrolytes which can be used to find out the molar conductance of acetic acid at infinite dilution.

Answer:

  1. It can be determined using Kohlrausch’s law of independent migration of ions.
  2. Molar conductivity at infinite dilution of an electrolyte is the sum of molar ionic conductivities of the cation and anion at infinite dilution.
  3. CH3COONa, HCl, NaCl & CH3COOK, HCl, KCl.

Question 8.
An electrochemical cell is a combination of two half cells consisting of a metal with its own ions in solution.

  1. Represent the Daniell cell.
  2. cathode and E°anode for the above cell are + 0.34 V and – 0.76 V respectively. Calculate the E°cell?
  3. Give the graphical interpretation of the following graph.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry four mark q8 img 13
Answer:

  1. Zn(s) | Zn2+(aq) || Cu2+(aq) | Cu(s)
  2. cell = E°cathode – E°anode = (-0.34V) – (-0.76V) = +1.1V
  3. The graph indicates the variation of conductance with dilution for strong and weak electrolytes. For both of them Λm increases with dilution. For strong electrolytes like KCl, the graph is a straight line since the variation is linear. But for weak electrolytes like CH3COOH the graph is a curve due to step increase in the value of molar conductance near infinite dilution.

Question 9.
The standard electrode potential of some electrodes are given below.

  • Ag+/Ag = + 0.80 V
  • Fe2+/Fe = – 0.44 V
  • Cu2+/Cu = + 0.34 V
  • Al3+/Al = – 1.66 V

Construct 4 possible electrochemical cells and calculate the cell potential of the corresponding cells?
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry four mark q9 img 14

Question 10.

  1. What do you mean by cells?
  2. What is the difference between primary cells and secondary cells?
  3. Fill in the following table:

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry four mark q10 img 15
Answer:
1. Cells are the devices in which chemical energy is converted into electrical energy.

2.

Primary cellSecondary cell
Electrode reaction cannot be reversed.Electrode reaction can be reversed by an external electric energy source.
Reaction occurs only once & after use they become dead; not chargeable.Reaction can occur many times in both directions; Rechargeable
Can’t be reusedCan be reused
Cannot be rechargedCan be recharged

3.

  • a – Zinc
  • b – Graphite
  • c – Zinc-Amalgam
  • d – HgO and Carbon
  • e – Paste of NH4Cl and ZnCl2
  • f – Paste of KOH and ZnO

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry

Question 11.
Iron gets destroyed due to continuous contact with the environment.

  1. Name the phenomenon.
  2. Suggest some prevention methods.
  3. Explain any one prevention method

Answer:
1. Corrosion

2. Some prevention methods

  • By using non-metallic coating
  • By using metallic coating
  • Cladding
  • Cathodic protection
  • Alloy formation

3. Metallic coating or electroplating iron is coated with zinc. Iron thus obtained is called galvanised iron. Coating of an electropositive metal on the metal surface.

Question 12.
Corrosion causes enormous damage to various articles made of metal.

  1. What do you mean by corrosion?
  2. What is barrier protection?
  3. Name any two metals which can be used as sacrificial electrodes in the electrochemical method of protecting iron.

Answer:
1. Destruction of a metal.

2. In this method, a barrier film is introduced between metal and atmospheric oxygen and moisture. Painting or with a thin film of oil or grease electroplaing.

3. Two metals which can be used as sacrificial electrodes in the electrochemical method of protecting iron

  • Mg
  • Zn

Question 13.
Scientists suggest fuel cells as an alternative for conventional methods of power generation.

  1. What are fuel cells?
  2. Give the overall cell reaction of the H2 – O2 fuel cell. Also draw a neat labelled diagram of this cell.
  3. What are the advantages of the fuel cells?

Answer:
1. Fuel cells are Galvanic cells designed to convert the energy of combustion of fuels directly into electrical energy.

2. The overall reaction taking place in an H2 – O2 fuel cell is 2H2(g) + O2(g) → 2H2O(l)
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry four mark q13 img 16

3. Advantages:

  • High efficiency
  • Steady voltage
  • Pollution free

Question 14.
Certain cells are given below.

  1. In Daniel cell, if Zn electrode is replaced by Mg what happens? Why?
  2. Zinc displaces copper from copper sulphate solution while copper doesn’t replace zinc from zinc sulphate solution. Justify your answer.

Answer:
1. If Zinc electrode is replaced by Mg, a greater voltage (> 1.1 V) will be produced by the cell. Because Mg lies above Zn in electrochemical series.
Mg2+Mg) = -2.36 V
Zn2+Zn) = -0.76 V
i. e., Mg is a stronger reducing agent than Zn.

2. Zinc lying above hydrogen in the electrochemical series has relatively greater tendency to lose electrons. Hence Zn is capable of displacing hydrogen from acids. Moreover, a more active metal Zn, displaces, a less reactive copper from the salt solution. But Cu, being less active than Zn cannot displace Zn from its salt, ZnSO4.

Plus Two Chemistry Electrochemistry NCERT Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Depict the galvanic cell in which the reaction Zn(s) + 2Ag+(aq) → Zn2+ + 2Ag(s) takes place. Further show:

  1. Which of the electrodes is negatively charged?
  2. The carriers of current in the cell.
  3. Individual reaction at each electrode.

Answer:
The electrochemical cell which will involve the given cell reaction is depicted as Zn(s) | Zn2+(aq) || Ag+(aq) | Ag(s)

1. In this cell, the electrode Zn(s) | Zn2+(aq) will act as negative terminal and Ag | Ag+(aq) electrode will act as positive terminal.

2. The conventional current will flow from silver to zinc electrode in the external circuit.

3. Individual reaction at each electrode:

  • Cathodic reaction: 2Ag+(aq) + 2e → 2Ag(s)
  • Anodic reaction: Zn(s) → Zn2+(aq) + 2e

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry

Question 2.
The resistance of a conductivity cell containing 0.001
M KCl solution at 298 K is 1500 Ω. What is the cell constant if conductivity of 0.001 M KCl solution at 298 K is 0.146 × 10-3 S cm-1?
Answer:
Cell constant = \(\frac{\text { Conductivity }}{\text { Conductance }}\)
i.e., Cell constant = Conductivity × Resistance = 0.146 × 10-3 S cm-1 × 1500 Ω
= 0.219 cm-1

Question 3.
How much electricity in Faraday is required to produce

  1. 20.0 g of Ca from molten CaCl2?
  2. 40.0 g of Al from molten Al2O3?

Answer:
1. The electrode reaction is
Ca2+(aq) + 2e → Ca(s)
Electricity required to produce 40 g Ca = 2 F
Electricity required to produce 20 g Ca = 1 F

2. The electrode reaction is
Al3+(aq) + 3e → Al(s)
Electricity required to produce 27 g of Al = 3 F
Electricity required to produce 40 g Al = \(\frac{3 F \times 40}{27}\) = 4.44 F

Question 4.
The conductivity of 0.20 M solution of KCl at 298 K is 0.0248 S cm-1. Calculate the molar conductivity.
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Electrochemistry one mark q8 img 1

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Data Structures and Operations

Students can Download Chapter 3 Data Structures and Operations Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Data Structures and Operations

Plus Two Computer Science Data Structures and Operations One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Write down the full form of FIFO.
Answer:
First In First Out

Question 2.
A queue is implemented in a ………… manner
(a) fifo
(b) filo
(c) life
(d) lilo
Answer:
(a) fifo

Question 3.
People waiting in a cinema theatre counter for taking tickets is an example for …………
(a) stack
(b) queue
(c) array
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) queue

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Data Structures and Operations

Question 4.
A linked list is a linear collection of data elements called ………….
Answer:
nodes

Question 5.
A stack can be grow or shrink, so it can be considered as ……………… data structure.
Answer:
dynamic

Question 6.
The data structure in which elements are arranged in non-sequence is named as type of data structure.
(a) Heterogeneous data structure
(b) Synthetic data structure
(c) Linear data structure
(d) Non-linear data structure
Answer:
(c) Linear data structure

Question 7.
Consider the following two statements.
(i). Memory of size dynamic data structures can be changed during execution.
(ii). Static data structures are associated with primary memory
(a) Statement (i) and statement (ii) are not true
(b) Statement (i) is true and statement (ii) is false
(c) Statement (i) is false and statement (ii) is true
(d) Statement (i) and statement (ii) are false
Answer:
(a) Statement (i) and statement (ii) are not true

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Data Structures and Operations

Question 8.
……………… is a data structure in which items are added at one end and removed from the other,
(a) Stack
(b) Queue
(c) List
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Queue

Question 9.
…………………. is very useful in situation when data have to be stored and then retrieved in reverse order,
(a) Stack
(b) Queue
(c) List
(d) Link list
Answer:
(a) Stack

Question 10.
Which of the following data structure is linear type?
(a) Graph
(b) Trees
(c) Binary tree
(d) Stack
Answer:
(d) Stack

Question 11.
Combining the elements of two sorted data structures to form a new one is referred as
(a) Merging
(b) Sorting
(c) Traversal
(d) Searching
Answer:
(a) Merging

Question 12.
Which term is applicable with stack data structure?
(a) LILO
(b) FILO
(c) LIFO
(d) FIFO
Answer:
(c) LIFO

Question 13.
Placing glasses one above another can be considered similar to ……….. data structure.
(a) Queue
(b) Stack
(c) Record
(d) Graph
Answer:
(b) Stack

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Data Structures and Operations

Question 14.
Each node containing data and a pointerto the next node is applicable with …………. data structure.
(a) Array
(b) Linked List
(c) Stack
(d) Queue
Answer:
(b) Linked List

Question 15.
Identify and correct mistake in the following Stack – PUSH algorithm,
start
if stack is full
return null
endif
top = top -1
stack[top] = data
stop
Answer:
top = top – 1 is to be replaced by top = top + 1

Question 16.
People waiting in a cinema theatre counter for taking tickets is an example for ………………
(a) stack
(b) queue
(c) array
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) queue

Plus Two Computer Science Concepts of Object-Oriented Programming Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A word, say “computer” is stored in an array. Another array is to be created by storing the reverse of the word. How can stack support you to perform this task? Explain the algorithm.
Answer:
This can be performed by pushing each character of the word “computer” onto a stack as it is read. After the word is finished, then the characters are popped off the stack, so they will come in the reverse order such as “retupmoc” in the desired output.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Data Structures and Operations

Question 2.
Name the principle by which tickets are issued in a Cinema Ticket counter. Which data structure supports this principle?
Answer:
It is an example for Queue. Here the persons are added at the back end and tickets are issued to the front end. The FIFO method is used.

Question 3.
Define stack. Write down short notes about stack.
Answer:
A stack is a linear structure in which items can be added or removed only at one end called top. Add an item into the stack is called push and deleting an item from the stack is called pop.

Question 4.
Write short notes about queue.
Answer:
A queue is also a linear structure in which the items can be added at the back end called rear and the items are removed from the front end. There are two operations adding an item at the rear end and removing an item from the front end.

Question 5.
Write an algorithm for Push operation on a stack;
Answer:

  • Step 1: If top = N. Then print “OVERFLOW” and return
  • Step 2: Set top = top + 1
  • Step 3: Set Stack[top] = item
  • Step 4: stop

Question 6.
Write an algorithm for Pop operation on a stack;
Answer:

  • Step 1: If top = Null. Then print “UNDERFLOW” and return
  • Step 2: Set item=Stack[top]
  • Step 3: Set-top = top – 1
  • Step 4: stop

Question 7.
A linked list containing all the name of students in your class is to be created. Write its C++ structure to define the node.
Answer:
struct node
{
char name[15];
node *link;
}

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Data Structures and Operations

Question 8.
Write a short note about circular queue.
Answer:
ClrcularQueue Is a linear data structure in which the operations are performed based on FIFO (First In First Out) principle and the last position is connected back to the first position to make a circle.

Question 9.
With suitable diagrams and notes, Explain the different classifications of data structures.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Concepts of Object-Oriented Programming img1

Plus Two Computer Science Concepts of Object-Oriented Programming Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Write an algorithm for inserting an element into a queue
Answer:

  • Step 1: If front = 1 and rear = N or front =rear + 1. Then print “OVERFLOW” and return
  • Step 2: If front = Null then Set front = 1 and rear = 1 Else if rear = N then set rear * 1 Else Set rear* rear + 1 End if
  • Step 3: Set Queue[rear] = item
  • Step 4: stop

Question 2.
Write an algorithm for deleting an element from a queue
Answer:

  • step 1: If front = Null then print “UNDERFLOW” and return
  • Step 2: Set item = Queue[front]
  • Step 3: If front = rearthen Set front = Null and rear = Null Else if front = N then set front = 1 Else Set front = front + 1 End if
  • Step 4; stop

Question 3.
Write the steps for inserting a new element to a queue.
Answer:

  • Step 1: If front = 1 and rear = N or front = rear +1 Then print “ OVERFLOW and return
  • Setp 2: If front = Null then Setfront = 1 and rear = 1 Else if near = N then Set rear * 1 Else Set rear* rear + 1 End if
  • Step 3: Set queue [rear] * item.
  • Step 4: Stop

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Data Structures and Operations

Question 4.
Write the steps for deleting an element from a queue
Answer:
Deletion operation
It is. the process of deleting(removing) a data item. from the queue from the front. If the queue is empty ‘ v ‘.and we try to delete an item from the queue makes 1 the queue underflow. Algorithm is given below

  • Step 1: If front = Null then print “UNDERFLOW: and return
  • Step 2: Set item = Queue [front]
  • Step 3: If front = Null and rear = Null Else if front N then set front = 1 Else Set front = front + 1 End if
  • Step 4: stop

Question 5.
Write the steps for deleting a node from a linked list?
Answer:
Deletion from a linked list
It is the removal of a node from the data structure.

  • Step 1: Get the address of the previous node (POS – 1) and next node (POS + 1) in the pointers PreNode and PostNode respectively.
  • Step 2: Copy the contents of PostNode into the link part of node at position (POS – 1).
  • Step 3: Free the node at position POS.

Plus Two Computer Science Concepts of Object-Oriented Programming Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Prepare a short note about all the operations associated with data structures:
Answer:
Operations on data structures

  1. Traversing – Accessing or visiting or reading all elements of a data structure is called Traversal.
  2. Searching – Searching is the process of finding elements in a data structure
  3. Inserting – It is the process of adding new data at particular location is called insertion.
  4. Deleting – It is the process of removing a particular element from the data structure.
  5. Sorting – Arranging elements in a particular order(ascending or descending) is called sorting. Examples are bubble sort and selection sort.
  6. Merging – This is the process of combining two sorted data structure and form a new one.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Data Structures and Operations

Question 2.
You are given a queue containing 50 students. Who will get the first chance and who will be irt the last position if the queue is in linear form.

  1. In which position you add a new student?
  2. In which problem you remove a student?
  3. Which operations are performed for this purpose?
  4. Write all steps for adding new students to a queue
  5. Write all steps for removing a student from the queue?

Answer:
1. At the back or rear position
2. From the front position
3. Add a new student to the queue is insertion and removing a student from the queue is called deletion
4.

  • Step 1: If front =1 and rear=N or front =rear+1. Then print “OVERFLOW” and return
  • Step 2: If front = Null then Set front = 1 and rear =1 Else if rear 3 N then set rear = 1 Else Set rear = rear+1 End if
  • Step 3: Set Queue[rear]=item Step 4: Stop

5.

  • Step 1: If front = Null then print “UNDERFLOW and return
  • Step 2: Set item = Queue[front]
  • Step 3: If front = rear then Set front Null and rear =Null Else if front N then set front = 1Else Set front = front + 1 End if
  • Step 4: stop

Question 3.
Class teacher said to the class leader to collecting their observation books and place them in a table one by one. Teacher should take books one by one from this group always from the top. Suppose that books be arranged in linear form from bottom to top

  1. In which position a new book can be placed?
  2. How can a book be taken from this group?
  3. Which operations are performed for this purpose?
  4. Write all steps for adding new books to this group or
  5. Write all steps for removing books one by one from this group.

Answer:
1. At the top
2. From the top.
3. To place a new book it is push operation and taking books from the stack is pop operation
4.

  • Step 1: If top = Null. Then print “UNDERFLOW” and return
  • Step 2: Set item = Stack[top]
  • Step 3: Set-top = top – 1
  • Step 4: stop

5.

  • Step 1: If front = 1 and rear=N or front =rear+1. Then print “OVERFLOW and return”
  • Step 2: If front = Null then Set front = 1 and rear =1 Else if rear = N then set rear = 1 Else Set rear = rear + 1
    End if

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Concepts of Object-Oriented Programming

Students can Download Chapter 2 Concepts of Object-Oriented Programming Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Concepts of Object-Oriented Programming

Plus Two Computer Science Concepts of Object-Oriented Programming One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Protecting data from access by unauthorized function is Data
(a) Polymorphism
(b) encapsulation
(c) data abstraction
(d) Inheritance
Answer:
(b) encapsulation

Question 2.
The act of partitioning a program into individual compoents is called,
(a) Polymorphism
(b) encapsulation
(c) data abstraction
(d) modularity
Answer:
(d) modularity

Question 3.
Which of the following is not an OOP concept?
(a) Overloading
(b) procedural programming
(c) data abstraction
(d) Inheritance
Answer:
(b) Procedural programming

Question 4.
The ability for a message or data to be processed in more than one form is called 6303 message or data.
(a) Polymorphism
(b) encapsulation
(c) data abstraction
(d) Inheritance
Answer:
(a) Polymorphism

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Concepts of Object-Oriented Programming

Question 5.
C++ is a ……. language.
(a) Qbject based
(b) non-procedural
(c) Object-oriented
(d) procedural
Answer:
(c) Object-oriented

Question 6.
Which of the following is not a characteristic of OOP?
(a) It emphasises more on procedure rather than data.
(b) It models real world
(c) It wraps up related data items and associated functions in the unit.
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) It emphasises more on procedure rather than data.

Question 7.
Which among the following is true about OOPs.
(a) It supports data abstraction
(b) It supports polymorphism
(c) It supports structured programming.
(d) It supports all the above
Answer:
(d) It supports all the above

Question 8.
Identify the correct statements from the following.
(a) Procedural programming approach aims more at procedures.
(b) The object-oriented approach views a problem in terms of objects involved.
(c) Real life cannot be modeled in OOP.
(d) Procedures takes a secondary status in object-oriented approach.
Answer:
(a), (b), (d)

Question 9.
“One form many behaviours” represents
(a) modularity
(b) Abstraction
(c) polymorphism
(d) Inheritance
Answer:
(c) polymorphism

Question 10.
What do you understand by programming paradigm?
Answer:
Paradigm means organizing principle of a program. It is an approach to programming.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Concepts of Object-Oriented Programming

Question 11.
What are the characteristics of procedural paradigm? Procedural programming.
Answer:
In procedural paradigm, the emphasis is on doing things. Data is the reason for a program’s existence. Yet data is given second class status while programming.

Question 12.
Which of the following is not a programming paradigm?
Answer:
(a) Object oriented
(b) Procedure oriented
(c) Both a and b
(d) Standard
Answer:
(d) Standard. This is not a programming paradigm

Question 13.
In programming, modules are composed of
(a) data types
(b) functions
(c) statements
(d) programs
Answer:
(b) functions

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Concepts of Object-Oriented Programming

Question 14.
The following function prototypes implement an OOP concept. Identify the concept and explain it.
Answer:
Polymorphism

Plus Two Computer Science Concepts of Object-Oriented Programming Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
State whether the following statements are true or false.

  1. In procedural oriented programming, data is the reason for a program’s existence.
  2. The real word concept gets simplified using concept of abstraction.

Answer:
1. False. In procedural programming, the emphasis is on doing actions or operations. Here data is not secure.

2. True. The real world concept gets simplified using concept of abstraction. In object-oriented programming the problems are viewed in terms of objects involved. Thus modeling real-world becomes easy in object oriented programming. Objects essential features alone are represented. This property is known as data abstraction.

Question 2.
How does inheritance support ‘reusability’?
Answer:
Inheritance allows the addition of additional features to an existing class without modifying it. One can derive a new class (subclass) from an existing one and add new features to it. There is reduction in amount of typing and efforts.

Question 3.
Define the termbase class, subclass and the relationship between a base class and subclass.
Answer:
Inheritance is the capability of a class to inherit properties from another class. That class that inherits from other class is subclass and the other class is base class. For eg: when we say that the class ‘student’ inherits from the class ‘person’, then ‘person’ is a base class of ‘student’ and ‘student’ is a subclass of ‘person’.

Question 4.
How the data is hidden and safe if encapsulation is implemented?
Answer:
Encapsulation is the way of combining both data and the functions that operate on that data. Encapsulation is most often achieved through information hiding, which is the process of hiding all the secrets of an object that do not contribute to its essential characteristics. The structure of an object is hidden.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Concepts of Object-Oriented Programming

Question 5.
Differentiate object and Class.
Answer:
An object is an identifiable entity with some characteristics and behavior. It represents an entity that can store data and its associated functions. A class is a group of objects that share common properties and relationships. It represents a group of similar objects

Question 6.
Distinguish class and object with the help of examples.
Answer:

  • Class – A class is a collection of objects with similar attributes.
  • Object – An object is an instance of the class. Furniture class is an example for class. Chair, Table, etc. are the instances ie. objects of the class furniture

Question 7.
When we switch on the computer, booting takes place. We do not know what all things are happening inside. Identify the OOP concept that resembles this scenario. Give another situation that resembles this concept.
Answer:
Data abstraction: It refers to the act of representing essential features without including the background details. Switchboard is an example for this.

Question 8.
Which of the following members of a C++ class data type are hidden from accessing?
(a) Private and protected members
(b) Private and public members
(c) Public and protected members
(d) Private, public and protected members
Answer:
(a) Private and protected members

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Concepts of Object-Oriented Programming

Question 9.
Explain how operator overloading implements polymorphism.
Answer:
Polymorphism is the ability for a message or data to be processed in more than one form. This is achieved by function overloading, operator overloading and dynamic binding.

Plus Two Computer Science Concepts of Object-Oriented Programming Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
You have seen a flask. When you put some ice-cubes in it, it will stay there for hours without melting and when you pour some hot water it will stay hot.

  1. Name the OOP feature that we can correlate with this situation.
  2. Write a short note about that feature

Answer:
1. Polymorphism

2. Polymorphism is an essential feature of object oriented programming. Polymorphism means having many forms. It is the capability of an object to behave differently in response to a message or action. That is, the same operation is performed differently depending upon the type of data it is working with. Polymorphism is implemented in C++ in two ways, compile time polymorphism and runtime polymorphism

Question 2.
Suppose your school is selected as the venue for conducting District youth festival. For the smooth functioning of the programme different committees are formed and each committee is assigned separate duties.

  1. Which OOP feature can be correlated to this situation?
  2. Write a brief note on that feature

Answer:
1. Modularity

2. When programs become larger, the program is broken into functions or modules. A module is separate unit in itself. Each unit can be compiled separately. All modules work hand in hand in order to achieve the program’s goal. The act of partitioning a program into individual unit is called modularity. It reduces program’s complexity.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Concepts of Object-Oriented Programming

Question 3.
You have seen the enquiry machine in a railway station. The user just types in a few details like train number, station, and date. The details of train, seat availability, fare, etc. will be displayed. The user is not aware of its working. Which OOP feature can you correlate with this situation?
Answer:
Data Abstraction:
Data abstraction is an important feature of OOP. It refers to the act of representing essential features without including the background details or explanations. Abstraction supports data hiding so that only the relevant information is expressed to the user and the rest of the information remains hidden from the user.

Question 4.
The famous luxury ship ‘TITANIC’ has provided all facilities like food, entertainment and medical aid available at that time for its passengers. Can you correlate this with any of the OOP features you have left. Justify.
Answer:
Encapsulation:
Encapsulation is the most fundamental concept of OOP. Placing data and functions together is the central idea of object oriented programming. This is known as Encapsulation

Question 5.
Using a real world example explain the concept of inheritance.
Answer:
Parent child relationship is the best example of inheritance. Child derives properties of parents. C++ supports inheritance.

It is the capability of one class to inherit properties from another class. In other words, inheritance is the process of creating new classes called derived classes, from existing base classes. The derived class inherits all the properties of base class but can add features of its own. The base class is unchanged by this process.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Concepts of Object-Oriented Programming img1

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Concepts of Object-Oriented Programming

Question 6.
In an ATM machine the user will be given options to access their account details, withdraw money, deposit money, etc. only. The background details are not shown to the user.

  1. Name the object oriented feature that we can correlate with this situation.
  2. Briefly explain about the feature.

Answer:
1. Data abstraction

2. Abstraction refers to the act of representing essential features without including the background details or explanations. Abstraction supports data fiding so that only the relevant information is expressed to the user and the rest of information remains hidden from the user.

Question 7.
Consider the diagram. Can you correlate any OOP feature from this? Write a note on the feature.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Concepts of Object-Oriented Programming img2
Answer:
Data Encapsulation. Placing data and functions together is the central idea of object oriented programming. This is encapsulation. It is a way to implement abstraction by wrapping up data and associated functions into a single unit.

Question 8.
Consider the following statements.
6 + 9 = 15 but ‘x’ + ‘yz’ = ‘xyz’ Which OOP feature can you infer from the above. Explain.
Answer:
Polymorphism. Polymorphism is the ability for a message or data to be processed in more than one form. The same operation is performed differently depending upon type of data it is working with.

Question 9.
Abstraction and encapsulation are complementary concepts of OOP. Justify.
Answer:
Abstraction and encapsulation are complementary concepts of OOP. Abstraction refers to the act of representing essential features without including the background details. Encapsulation is wrapping up of data and functions into a single unit. Abstraction focuses upon the observable behaviour of an object, whereas encapsulation focuses upon the implementation that gives rise to this behaviour

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Concepts of Object-Oriented Programming

Question 10.
Write four reasons for the increasing complexity of procedural programming.
Answer:
Following are the main reasons of increasing the procedural language complexity.

  1. Data is undervalued
  2. Adding new data requires modifications to all/many functions.
  3. Creating new data types is difficult
  4. Provides poor real world modeling

Question 11.
List the advantages of Object Oriented Programming.
Answer:

  1. OOP allows modularity (divide the large programs into smaller ones.)
  2. it is good for defining abstract data types
  3. It allows data abstraction
  4. It allows code reusability
  5. Real life entities can be easily created
  6. It supports to create new data types.

Question 12.
Identify a suitable attribute from the 2nd column and an associated behaviour from 3rd column for each object in the 1st column.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Concepts of Object-Oriented Programming img3
Answer:
i) → b → 4
ii) → d → 3
iii) → a → 2

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Concepts of Object-Oriented Programming

Question 13.
“School kalolsavam” is organised with the help of various committees. Each committee is assigned with a specific task. Identify the OOP concept that is analogous to this situation. Give another real life case that resembles with this concept.
Answer:
The OOP concept used in this situation is modularity. Consider the situation to fill up the application forms of students in a class. Suppose one application form takes nearly 5 minutes of time.

So a class teachers will take 5 * 50 = 250 minutes to fill up the application forms of the entire class. Instead of this, the teacher distributes the application forms to the students, that takes only 5 minutes and teachers gives 5 minutes instructures to the students how to fill up the forms:

Next 5 minutes enough for the students to complete the work. After that the next 5 minutes to return back the filled up application forms. So the entire work will take only 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 = 20 minutes

Question 14.
Look at the following figure:
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Concepts of Object-Oriented Programming img4

  1. Identify the OOP concept shown by the figure.
  2. Write short note about this concept.

Answer:
1. Inheritance

2. Inheritance is the capability Of one class of things to inherit properties from another class. The class from which attributes are inherited is called the base class. The inherited class is called derived class.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics

Students can Download Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics Questions and Answers, Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics

Plus Two Chemistry Chemical Kinetics One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The rate of a reaction is expressed as
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics one marks q1 img
The reaction is
(a) 4A + B → 2C + 3D
(b) B + 3D → 4A + 2C
(c) A + B → C + D
(d) B + D → A + C
Answer:
(b) B + 3D → 4A + 2C

Question 2.
Order of a reaction can
(a) rational
(b) zero
(c) integer
(d) all the above
Answer:
(d) all the above

Question 3.
The unit of rate constant for a zero order reaction is.
(a) L s-1
(b) L mol-1 s-1
(c) mol L-1 s-1
(d) mol s-1
Answer:
(c) mol L-1 s-1

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics

Question 4.
The expression for half-life period of a first order is ___________
Answer:
t1/2 = \(\frac{0.693}{k}\)

Question 5.
A plot of log k vs \(\frac{1}{T}\) helps to calculate
(a) Energy of activation
(b) Rate constant of the reaction
(c) Order of the reaction
(d) Energy of activation as well as the frequency factor.
Answer:
(d) Energy of activation as well as the frequency factor

Question 6.
When the initial concentration of the reactant in a reaction is doubled the half life period of the reaction gets halved. The order of the reaction is _____
Answer:
2

Question 7.
In first order reaction, the concentration of the reactant decreases from 0.6 M to 0.3 M in 30 minutes. The time taken for the concentration to change from 0.1 M to 0.25 M is
Answer:
60 minute

Question 8.
The rate constant of a first order reaction is doubled when the temperature is increased from 20°C to 25°C. How many times to rate constant will increase if the temperature is raised from 20°C to 40°C
Answer:
16

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics

Question 9.
The unit mol L-1 s-1 is meant for the rate constant of the reaction having the order _____
Answer:
Zero

Question 10.
If the activation energy for the forward reaction is 150 kJ/mol and that of the reverse reaction is 260 kJ/ mol. What is the enthalpy change?
Answer:
110 kJ/mol

Plus Two Chemistry Chemical Kinetics Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Explain a graphical method for determination of activation energy.
Answer:
Activation energy can be determined graphically from the Ink vs 1/T graph. From the graph,
In k = ln(Ae-Ea/RT)
In k = In A + in e-Ea/RT
In k = In A + -Ea /RT
This is in the form of y = mx + c
When a graph is plotted between 1/T and ln k, a straight line is obtained.
Slope of the line = Ea/R
Therefore, Ea = slope × R

Question 2.
Choose the correct answer. The equation for t1/2 of first order reaction is

  1. t1/2 = 0.693/k
  2. t1/2 = [R]0/2k

Answer:
1. t1/2 = 0.693/k

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics

Question 3.
In a Chemistry class, teacher asked to write the rate expressions for the reaction,
NO2 + CO → NO + CO2-
Student 1 wrote: Rate ∝ [NO1/2] [CO]
Student 2 wrote: Rate ∝ [NO1/2] [NO1/2]

  1. Which is correct?
  2. Justify your answer.

Answer:

  1. Student 2 is correct.
  2. In fact the reaction takes place in 2 steps. They are,

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics two marks q3 img 1

According to the law of chemical kinetics, the rate of a reaction is determined by the slowest step. Here step 1 is the slowest step i.e., rate determining step. By the law of mass action, rate of a chemical reaction is directly proportional to the product of molar concentration of the reactants.
rate = k[NO2][NO2]= k[NO2]2

Question 4.
What do you mean by rate of a reaction? Explain the method for the determination of the rate of reaction.
Answer:
Rate of a chemical reaction is the amount of product formed in unit time or the amount of reactant that reacted in unit time.
Rate = dx/dt. Here dx represents the amount of the product formed in a small interval of time dt.

Question 5.
1. Mention the order of the following reactions:

  • CH3COOC2H5 + H2O → CH3COOH + C2H5OH
  • C12H22O11 + H2O → C6H12O6 + C6H12O6

2. Unit of the rate constant of a reaction depends on the order of the reaction. If the concentration is expressed in mol/L and time in second. Find the unit of k for zero, first and second order reactions.
Answer:
1. Order of the reactions:

  • Pseudo 1st order
  • Pseudo 1st order

2. Zero order = L-1 mol1 s-1
1st order = s-1
2nd order = L mol-1 s-1

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics

Question 6.
Match the following:

Type of reactionOrder
Photochemical3
Nuclear reaction2
2NO + O2 → 2NO21
N2 + O2 → 2NO0

Answer:

Type of reactionOrder
Photochemical0
Nuclear reaction1
2NO + O2 → 2NO23
N2 + O2 → 2NO2

Question 7.
Mention the factors that affect the rate of a chemical reaction.
Answer:
The various factors that affect the rate of a chemical reaction are:

  • Concentration of reactants
  • Temperature of reaction
  • Presence of catalyst
  • Nature of reactants
  • Surface area
  • Exposure to radiation

Plus Two Chemistry Chemical Kinetics Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Derive the expression for the half-life of a chemical reaction of first order?
Answer:
For a first order reaction,
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics three marks q1 img 2
Thus, for a first order reaction, half-life period is constant, i.e., it is independent of initial concentration of the reacting species.

Question 2.
Say True or False.

  1. The rate of the reaction NO2 + CO → NO + CO2 can be written as a rate a [NO2]1 [CO]1.
  2. The reaction NO2 + CO → NO + CO2 takes place through one step.
  3. If a reaction takes place through more than two steps, the rate of the reaction is determined by the slowest step.

Answer:

  1. False
  2. False
  3. True

Question 3.
The rate of a chemical reaction is influenced by many factors.

  1. Write any five factors influencing rate of a reaction.
  2. Write a short note about temperature dependence of rate of a reaction.

Answer:

  1. Nature of the reactants, concentration of the reactants, temperature, pressure, catalyst, surface area, influence of radiation.
  2. Usually the rate of chemical reaction increases when the temperature increases. The rate of a chemical reaction is found to be twice that of the original value for every 10° raise of temperature.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics

Question 4.
Consider the statement: “Sum of average kinetic energy and activation energy is equal to threshold energy”.

  1. Is this correct?
  2. Define activation energy.
  3. Name the two methods used to determine the activation energy.

Answer:

  1. Yes.
  2. The excess amount of energy that is to be given to the reactant molecules in order to involve in a chemical reaction is called activation energy.
  3. Theoretical method and graphical method.

Question 5.
“Nuclear reactions are first order reactions.”

  1. Do you agree?
  2. What do you mean by order of a reaction?
  3. Write two differences between order and molecularity.

Answer:

  1. Yes.
  2. Order of a chemical reaction is the sum of the powers of the concentration terms which occur in the rate expression.
  3. Two differences between order and molecularity:
    • Order: Experimental, can be zero.
    • Molecularity: Theoretical, cannot be zero.

Question 6.
Analyse the statements:
Statement 1: “Half life of every reactions depend upon the initial amount.’’
Statement 2: “Half life depends on the initial amount except in the case of first order reactions.”

  1. Which statement is correct?
  2. Give the expressions for half life of a first order reaction. State how it is related to the initial concentration.
  3. Show that t1/2 of zero order reaction depends on initial amount?

Answer:
1. Statement 2.

2. t1/2 = \(\frac{0.693}{k}\)
t1/2 of a first order reaction is independent of the initial concentration of the reacting species.

3. For a zero order reaction,
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics three marks q6 img 3
Where [R]0 is the initial amount.
i.e., t1/2 of zero order reaction is directly proportional to the initial amount.

Question 7.
A relation is given below. Answer the following questions.
Average kinetic energy + Activation energy = Threshold energy

  1. Explain Average Kinetic Energy, Activation Energy, and Threshold Energy.
  2. Give the equation showing the relation between rate constant and temperature and explain the terms.
  3. Name the above equation.

Answer:
1. Average kinetic Energy – The energy possessed by the reactant molecules which are involved in a chemical reaction.
Threshold energy – The minimum amount of energy required for the reactant molecules in order to involve in a chemical reaction.
Activation Energy – The excess amount of energy that is to be given to the reactant molecules in order to involve in a chemical reaction.

2. k = A e-Ea/RT

  • A → constant (frequency factor)
  • T → Temperature in Kelvin
  • Ea → Activation energy
  • K → Rate constant

3. Arrhenius equation.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics

Question 8.
Inversion of sucrose in presence of dilute acid is said to be pseudo first order reaction.

  1. Why is it said to be so?
  2. Give another example of pseudo order reaction.

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics three marks q8 img 4
The rate depends only on the concentration of sucrose and it is independent of the concentration of water. Thus, the reaction appears to be of second order but actually follows first order kinetics,

2. Hydrolysis of ester in presence of acid.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics three marks q8 img 5

Question 9.
For a reaction A + B → C + D, the rate equation is given by, r = k[A] [B],

  1. What is the order of the above reaction?
  2. Find the unit of k in the above rate equation.
  3. What happens to the order of the reaction if‘B’is taken in large excess?

Answer:

  1. 2nd order
  2. L mol-1s-1
  3. If B is taken in large excess, the reaction behaves as 1st order reaction. Such reactions are called pseudo 1st order reactions.

Question 10.
For a reaction A → P, the rate of the reaction doubles when the concentration of A is increased by two times.

  1. Determine the order of the reaction.
  2. Derive an expression to determine the 14th life period of above order reaction.

Answer:

  1. First order reaction.
  2. 1/4th life of a first order reaction can be determined as follows.

Question 11.
Fora reaction A + B → products, the rate equation is given as rate = k[A]1/2 [B]2

  1. What is the order of the above reaction?
  2. Distinguish between order and molecularity.

Answer:
1. Order of the reaction = \(2+\frac{1}{2}=\frac{5}{2}\)
2.

MolecularityOrder
1. Experimental1. Theoretical
2. Can be zero2. Can not be zero
3. Can be a fraction3. Cannot be a fraction
4. No.of reacting species taking part in an elementary reaction, which must collide simultane­ously to bring about a chemical reaction4. Sum of the powers of the concentration of the reactants in the rate law expression

Question 12.
For the reaction:
2A + B → A2B
the rate = k[A][B]2 with k = 2.0 × 10-6 mol-2 L2 s-1. Calculate the initial rate of the reaction when [A] = 0.1 mol L-1 [B] = 0.2 mol L-1. Calculate the rate of reaction after [A] is reduced to 0.06 mol L-1.
Answer:
Initial rate = k[A][B]2
But [A] = 0.1 M, [B] = 0.2 M and
k = 2.0 × 10-6 mol-2 L2 s-1
∴ Initial rate
= 2.0 × 10-6 mol-2 L2 s-1 × 0.1 M × (0.2 M)2
= 8 × 10-9 M s-1

From the equation 2A + B → A2B it is clear that when 2 moles of A are used then 1 mol of B is used in the same time. Therefore, when A has been reduced to 0.06 M , 0.04 M of A and hence 0.02 M of B have reacted. Thus,
Concentration of A left = [A] = 0.06 M
Concentration of B left = [B] = (0.2 M – 0.02 M) = 0.18 M
Rate = k[A][B]2
= 2.0 × 10-6 mol-2 L2 s-1 × 0.06M × (0.18 M)2
= 3.89 × 10-9M s-1

Question 13.
The decomposition of NH3 on platinum surface is zero order reaction. What are the rates of production of N2 and H2 if k = 2.5 × 10-4 mol-1 L s-1?
Answer:
The decomposition of NH3 is
2NH3 → N2 + 3H2
Rate of reaction,
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics three marks q13 img 7
where k is the rate constant. Since, reaction is of zero order,
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics three marks q13 img 8

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics

Question 14.
The rate constant of a first order reaction is 60 s-1. How much time will it take to reduce the initial concentration of the reactant to its 1/16th value?
Answer:
Rate constant of reaction, k = 60 s-1
t15/16 = ?
Rate constant of first order reaction is given as,
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics three marks q14 img 9

Question 15.
The rate of a reaction quadruples when the temperature changes from 293 K to 313 K. Calculate the energy of activation of the reaction assuming that it does not change with temperature.
Answer:
T1 = 293K, T2 = 313K
According to Arrhenius equation,
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics three marks q15 img 10
2.303 × 8.314 J K-1 mol-1 × 4585.45 K × 0.6021
= 52863.33 J mol-1 = 52.86 kJ mol-1

Plus Two Chemistry Chemical Kinetics Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics four marks q1 img

  1. Which type of the reaction is this?
  2. Write the order and molecularity of the reaction.
  3. What is the unit of rate constant?
  4. Write the 3 steps involved in this reaction?

Answer:

  1. Photochemical reaction
  2. Order = 0 Molecularity = 2
  3. L-1 mol1 sec-1
  4. Initiation, propagation, termination

Question 2.
K = Ae-Ea/RT

  1. Write the name of this equation.
  2. What do you mean by Ea?
  3. Draw the graph between 1/T and Ink.
  4. Write the significance of k.

Answer:
1. Arrhenius equation.

2. The excess amount of energy that is to be given to the reactant molecules in order to involve in a chemical reaction is called activation energy (Ea)

3.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics four marks q2 img 11

4. By noting the value of k, we can predict the speed of a chemical reaction. In the case of a fast reaction, the value of k is high and in the case of a slow reaction value of k is small. By noting the unit of rate constant, we can predict the order of chemical reaction.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics

Question 3.
Match the following:

First order reaction2NO + O2 → 2NO2
Second order reactionCH3CHO → CH4 + CO
Third order reactionPhotochemical
11/2 order reactionN2 + O2 → 2NO
Zero order reactionH2O → 2H2O + 1/2O2

Answer:

First order reactionH2O2 → H2O + 1/2O2
Second order reactionN2 + O2 → 2NO
Third order reaction2NO + O2 → 2NO2
11/2 order reactionCH3CHO → CH4 + CO
Zero order reactionPhotochemical

Question 4.
Consider the reaction
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics four marks q3 img 12
Answer the following questions

  1. Write down 2 steps through which the reaction takes place.
  2. Find out the slowest step.
  3. Which is the rate-determining step?
  4. Find out the order of the reaction.

Answer:
1. 2H2O2 + I → H2O + IO
H2O2 + IO → H2O + I + O2

2. 2H2O2 + I → H2O + IO

3. 2H2O2 + I → H2O + IO

4. Order = 2

Question 5.
A chemical reaction is conducted within two hours. But after one hour half of the product is obtained.

  1. Name the term used to designate this time?
  2. Give the expression for this term if it is a first order reaction.
  3. Calculate the rate constant of the above reaction.

Answer:

  1. Half life of a chemical reaction.
  2. t1/2 = \(\frac{0.693}{k}\)
  3. k = \(=\frac{0.693}{t_{1 / 2}}=\frac{0.693}{1 \mathrm{hr}}\) = 0.693 hr-1

Question 6.

  1. Define half-life period of a reaction.
  2. A first order reaction is found to have a rate constant k = 5.5 × 10-14 s-1. Find the half-life period of the reaction.

Answer:
1. Time in which the concentration of the reactant is reduced to one half of its initial concentration.
2.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics four marks q6 img 13

Question 7.
Order of a reaction is an experimental quantity.
(1) Calculate the overall order of a reaction which has the rate expression:
a) Rate = k[A]1/2[B]3/2
b) Rate = k[A]3/2[B]-1
(2) The initial concentration of N2O5 in the following first order reaction N2O6 (g) → 2NO2(g) + 1/2 O2(g) was 1.24 × 10-2 mol/L at 318 K.

The concentration of N2O5, after 60 min was 0.20 × 10-2  mol/L. Calculate the rate constant of the reaction at 318 K.
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics four marks q7 img 14

Question 8.
1. Write the rate expression for the following reaction.
2N2O5(g) → 4NO2(g) + O2(g)
2. For a hypothetical reaction, aX + bY → Products, the rate law is given as \(\frac{d x}{d t}\) = k[X]2[Y]1/2. What happens to the rate of the reaction when

  • The concentration of ‘X’ is doubled keeping that of ‘Y’ constant.
  • The concentration of both ‘Y’ is doubled keeping that of ‘X’ constant.

Answer:
1. Rate expression:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics four marks q8 img 15
2.

  • Increases by 4 times
  • Increases by \(\sqrt{2}\) times.

Question 9.
1. Identify the reaction order.

  • k= 2.3 × 10-5 L/mol/s
  • k= 3 × 10-4 s-1

2. Calculate the activation energy. The rate constants of a reaction are 1 × 10-3 s-1 and 2 × 10-3 s-1 at 30°C and 40°C respectively.
Answer:
1. The reaction order:

  • Second order
  • First order

2.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics four marks q9 img 16

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics

Question 10.
For a reaction A + B → Product, the rate law is given by r= k[A] [B],

  1. What is the order of the reaction?
  2. What will be the effect of temperature on rate constant?
  3. Can activation energy for reactions be zero? Justify your answer.

Answer:
1. Order is the sum of the powers of the concentration terms in the rate law.
rate = K [A]x [B]y
∴ Order = x + y

2. According to Arrhenius equation, at a particular temperature for a definite value of activation energy, rate constant,
k ∝ e-1/T

3. If average kinetic energy of reactant molecule is equal to threshold energy, then activation energy can be zero.

Plus Two Chemistry Chemical Kinetics NCERT Questions and Answers

Question 1.
For the reaction:
2A + B → A2B
the rate = k[A][B]2 with k = 2.0 × 10-6 mol-2 L2 s-1. Calculate the initial rate of the reaction when [A] = 0.1 mol L-1 [B] = 0.2 mol L-1. Calculate the rate of reaction after [A] is reduced to 0.06 mol L-1.
Answer:
Initial rate = k[A][B]2
But [A] = 0.1 M, [B] = 0.2 M and
k = 2.0 × 10-6 mol-2 L2 s-1
Initial rate
= 2.0 × 10-6 mol-2 L2 s-1 × 0.1 M × (0.2 M)2
= 8 × 10-9 M s-1

From the equation 2A + B → A2B it is clear that when 2 moles of A are used then 1 mol of B is used in the same time. Therefore, when A has been reduced to 0.06 M , 0.04 M of A and hence 0.02 M of B have reacted. Thus,
Concentration of A left = [A] = 0.06 M.
Concentration of B left = [B] = (0.2 M – 0.02 M) = 0.18 M
Rate = k[A][B]2
= 2.0 × 10-6 mol-2 L2 s-1 × 0.06M × (0.18 M)2
= 3.89 × 10-9M s-1

Question 2.
Mention the factors that affect the rate of a chemical reaction.
Answer:
The various factors that affect the rate of a chemical reaction are:

  • Concentration of reactants
  • Temperature of reaction
  • Presence of catalyst
  • Nature of reactants
  • Surface area
  • Exposure to radiation

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics

Question 3.
The decomposition of NH3 on platinum surface is zero order reaction. What are the rates of production of N2 and H2 if k = 2.5 × 10-4 mol-1 L s-1?
Answer:
The decomposition of NH3 is
2NH3 → N2 + 3H2
Rate of reaction,
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics three marks q13 img 7
where k is the rate constant. Since, reaction is of zero order,
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics three marks q13 img 8

Question 4.
The rate constant of a first order reaction is 60 s-1. How much time will it take to reduce the initial concentration of the reactant to its 1/16th value?
Answer:
Rate constant of reaction, k = 60 s-1
t15/16 = ?
Rate constant of first order reaction is given as,
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics three marks q14 img 9

Question 5.
The rate of a reaction quadruples when the temperature changes from 293 K to 313 K. Calculate the energy of activation of the reaction assuming that it does not change with temperature.
Answer:
T1 = 293K, T2 = 313K
According to Arrhenius equation,
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics three marks q15 img 10
2.303 × 8.314 J K-1 mol-1 × 4585.45 K × 0.6021
= 52863.33 J mol-1 = 52.86 kJ mol-1